FCC ID: I88VMG4380B10A Wireles N VDSL2 4-port Bonding Combo WAN Gateway with HPNA

VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-

B10A Wireless N VDSL2 4-port Gateway with USB Default Login Details LAN IP Address User Name Password http://192.168.1.1 admin 1234 Version 1.00 Edition 1, 9/2012 www.zyxel.com www.zyxel.com IMPORTANT!

Copyright 2012 ZyXEL Communications Corporation IMPORTANT!

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE. KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. Note: This guide is a reference for a series of products. Therefore some features or options in this guide may not be available in your product. Graphics in this book may differ slightly from the product due to differences in operating systems, operating system versions, or if you installed updated firmware/software for your device. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access. Support Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents. ZyXEL Web Site Please refer to www.zyxel.com for additional support documentation and product certifications. 2 VMG1312-B Series Users Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Users Guide .......................................................................................................................................15 Introducing the Device ............................................................................................................................17 The Web Configurator .............................................................................................................................25 Quick Start ...............................................................................................................................................33 Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................................35 Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................69 Network Map and Status Screens ...........................................................................................................71 Broadband ...............................................................................................................................................75 Wireless ..................................................................................................................................................99 Home Networking ..................................................................................................................................131 Routing ..................................................................................................................................................153 Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................................159 Network Address Translation (NAT) ......................................................................................................177 Dynamic DNS Setup .............................................................................................................................193 Interface Group .....................................................................................................................................197 USB Service ..........................................................................................................................................203 Firewall ..................................................................................................................................................209 MAC Filter .............................................................................................................................................219 Parental Control ....................................................................................................................................221 Scheduler Rules ....................................................................................................................................225 Certificates ............................................................................................................................................227 Log .......................................................................................................................................................235 Traffic Status ........................................................................................................................................239 ARP Table .............................................................................................................................................243 Routing Table ........................................................................................................................................245 IGMP Status .........................................................................................................................................247 xDSL Statistics ......................................................................................................................................249 User Account .........................................................................................................................................253 Remote Management ............................................................................................................................255 TR-069 Client ........................................................................................................................................257 TR-064 ..................................................................................................................................................259 Time Settings ........................................................................................................................................261 E-mail Notification .................................................................................................................................265 Logs Setting .........................................................................................................................................267 Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................................271 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................273 Diagnostic .............................................................................................................................................276 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 3 Contents Overview Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................281 4 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents Contents Overview ..............................................................................................................................3 Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................5 Part I: Users Guide ......................................................................................... 15 Chapter 1 Introducing the Device .......................................................................................................................17 1.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................17 1.2 Ways to Manage the Device .............................................................................................................17 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Device ..............................................................................................17 1.4 Applications for the Device ...............................................................................................................18 1.4.1 Internet Access ........................................................................................................................18 1.4.2 HomePNA ................................................................................................................................19 1.4.3 Devices USB Support .............................................................................................................20 1.5 LEDs (Lights) ....................................................................................................................................21 1.6 Wireless Access ................................................................................................................................23 1.6.1 Using the WLAN/WPS Button .................................................................................................23 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator ........................................................................................................................25 2.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................25 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................25 2.2 Web Configurator Layout ..................................................................................................................28 2.2.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................................28 2.2.2 Main Window ...........................................................................................................................29 2.2.3 Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................................29 Chapter 3 Quick Start...........................................................................................................................................33 3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................33 3.2 Quick Start Setup ..............................................................................................................................33 Chapter 4 Tutorials...............................................................................................................................................35 4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................35 4.2 Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection ..........................................................................................35 4.3 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network .............................................................................................38 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 5 Table of Contents 4.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings .............................................................................38 4.3.2 Using WPS ..............................................................................................................................40 4.3.3 Without WPS ...........................................................................................................................43 4.4 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups ................................................................................................44 4.5 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network .................................................................47 4.6 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup ........................................................................................50 4.7 Access the Device Using DDNS .......................................................................................................53 4.7.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org ..................................................................53 4.7.2 Configuring DDNS on Your Device ..........................................................................................54 4.7.3 Testing the DDNS Setting ........................................................................................................54 4.8 Configuring the MAC Address Filter ..................................................................................................55 4.9 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer ....................................................................................56 4.10 Using the Media Server Feature ....................................................................................................57 4.10.1 Configuring the Device ..........................................................................................................57 4.10.2 Using Windows Media Player ................................................................................................57 4.10.3 Using a Digital Media Adapter ...............................................................................................60 4.11 Using the Print Server Feature ........................................................................................................62 Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 69 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens .....................................................................................................71 5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................71 5.2 The Network Map Screen .................................................................................................................71 5.3 The Status Screen .............................................................................................................................72 Chapter 6 Broadband...........................................................................................................................................75 6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................75 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................75 6.1.2 What You Need to Know ..........................................................................................................76 6.1.3 Before You Begin .....................................................................................................................78 6.2 The Broadband Screen .....................................................................................................................78 6.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection ...................................................................................................79 6.3 The 3G Backup Screen .....................................................................................................................86 6.4 The Advanced Screen .......................................................................................................................90 6.5 The 8021x Screen .............................................................................................................................92 6.5.1 Edit 802.1x Settings .................................................................................................................93 6.6 Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................93 Chapter 7 Wireless ...............................................................................................................................................99 6 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Table of Contents 7.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................99 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................99 7.1.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................................100 7.2 The General Screen .......................................................................................................................100 7.2.1 No Security ............................................................................................................................103 7.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) ........................................................................................................103 7.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) ..................................................................................................105 7.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication ...........................................................................................................106 7.3 The More AP Screen .......................................................................................................................107 7.3.1 Edit More AP ........................................................................................................................108 7.4 MAC Authentication ........................................................................................................................109 7.5 The WPS Screen ............................................................................................................................ 110 7.6 The WMM Screen ........................................................................................................................... 112 7.7 The WDS Screen ............................................................................................................................ 113 7.7.1 WDS Scan ............................................................................................................................. 114 7.8 The Others Screen .......................................................................................................................... 115 7.9 The Channel Status Screen ............................................................................................................ 117 7.10 Technical Reference ...................................................................................................................... 117 7.10.1 Wireless Network Overview ................................................................................................. 117 7.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms ................................................................................................... 119 7.10.3 Wireless Security Overview ................................................................................................. 119 7.10.4 Signal Problems ..................................................................................................................121 7.10.5 BSS .....................................................................................................................................122 7.10.6 MBSSID ...............................................................................................................................122 7.10.7 Preamble Type ....................................................................................................................123 7.10.8 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) ...................................................................................123 7.10.9 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) ...............................................................................................123 Chapter 8 Home Networking .............................................................................................................................131 8.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................131 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................131 8.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................................132 8.1.3 Before You Begin ...................................................................................................................133 8.2 The LAN Setup Screen ...................................................................................................................133 8.3 The Static DHCP Screen .................................................................................................................136 8.4 The UPnP Screen ...........................................................................................................................138 8.5 Installing UPnP in Windows Example .............................................................................................139 8.6 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ............................................................................................141 8.7 The Additional Subnet Screen ........................................................................................................147 8.8 The STB Vendor ID Screen .............................................................................................................148 8.9 The 5th Ethernet Port Screen .........................................................................................................148 8.10 The LAN VLAN Screen .................................................................................................................149 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 7 Table of Contents 8.11 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................150 8.11.1 LANs, WANs and the Device ...............................................................................................150 8.11.2 DHCP Setup ........................................................................................................................150 8.11.3 DNS Server Addresses ........................................................................................................151 8.11.4 LAN TCP/IP .........................................................................................................................151 Chapter 9 Routing ..............................................................................................................................................153 9.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................153 9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................153 9.2 The Routing Screen ........................................................................................................................154 9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route .............................................................................................................155 9.3 The Policy Forwarding Screen ........................................................................................................155 9.3.1 Add/Edit Policy Forwarding ...................................................................................................157 9.4 The RIP Screen ...............................................................................................................................157 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)...................................................................................................................159 10.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................159 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................159 10.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................160 10.3 The Quality of Service General Screen ........................................................................................161 10.4 The Queue Setup Screen .............................................................................................................162 10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue .........................................................................................................164 10.5 The Class Setup Screen ...............................................................................................................164 10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class ............................................................................................................166 10.6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen .....................................................................................................169 10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer .......................................................................................................170 10.7 The QoS Monitor Screen .............................................................................................................171 10.8 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................172 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)................................................................................................177 11.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................177 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................177 11.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................177 11.2 The Port Forwarding Screen ........................................................................................................178 11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding ....................................................................................................180 11.3 The Applications Screen ...............................................................................................................181 11.3.1 Add New Application ............................................................................................................182 11.4 The Port Triggering Screen ...........................................................................................................182 11.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule .............................................................................................184 11.5 The DMZ Screen ...........................................................................................................................185 8 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Table of Contents 11.6 The ALG Screen ............................................................................................................................186 11.7 The Address Mapping Screen .......................................................................................................186 11.7.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule ..........................................................................................187 11.8 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................188 11.8.1 NAT Definitions ....................................................................................................................188 11.8.2 What NAT Does ...................................................................................................................189 11.8.3 How NAT Works ...................................................................................................................190 11.8.4 NAT Application ...................................................................................................................191 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup .........................................................................................................................193 12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................193 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................193 12.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................194 12.2 The DNS Entry Screen ..................................................................................................................194 12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry .............................................................................................................195 12.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen ............................................................................................................195 Chapter 13 Interface Group .................................................................................................................................197 13.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................197 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................197 13.2 The Interface Group Screen ..........................................................................................................197 13.2.1 Interface Group Configuration .............................................................................................198 13.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria .................................................................................................200 Chapter 14 USB Service ......................................................................................................................................203 14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................203 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................203 14.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................203 14.2 The File Sharing Screen ...............................................................................................................204 14.2.1 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................205 14.3 The Media Server Screen .............................................................................................................206 14.4 The Printer Server Screen ............................................................................................................207 14.4.1 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................207 Chapter 15 Firewall ..............................................................................................................................................209 15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................209 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................209 15.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................210 15.2 The Firewall Screen ...................................................................................................................... 211 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 9 Table of Contents 15.3 The Service Screen ...................................................................................................................... 211 15.3.1 Add/Edit a Service ..............................................................................................................212 15.4 The Access Control Screen ..........................................................................................................213 15.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule ........................................................................................................215 15.5 The DoS Screen ............................................................................................................................216 Chapter 16 MAC Filter..........................................................................................................................................219 16.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................219 16.2 The MAC Filter Screen ..................................................................................................................219 Chapter 17 Parental Control................................................................................................................................221 17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................221 17.2 The Parental Control Screen .........................................................................................................221 17.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Rule .........................................................................................222 Chapter 18 Scheduler Rules................................................................................................................................225 18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................225 18.2 The Scheduler Rules Screen ........................................................................................................225 18.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule ............................................................................................................226 Chapter 19 Certificates ........................................................................................................................................227 19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................227 19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................227 19.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................227 19.3 The Local Certificates Screen .......................................................................................................228 19.3.1 Create Certificate Request .................................................................................................229 19.3.2 Load Signed Certificate ......................................................................................................230 19.4 The Trusted CA Screen ................................................................................................................231 19.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate .................................................................................................232 19.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate ..............................................................................................233 Chapter 20 Log ....................................................................................................................................................235 20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................235 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................235 20.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................235 20.2 The System Log Screen ................................................................................................................236 20.3 The Security Log Screen ...............................................................................................................237 10 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Table of Contents Chapter 21 Traffic Status ....................................................................................................................................239 21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................239 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................239 21.2 The WAN Status Screen ...............................................................................................................239 21.3 The LAN Status Screen .................................................................................................................241 Chapter 22 ARP Table ..........................................................................................................................................243 22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................243 22.1.1 How ARP Works ..................................................................................................................243 22.2 ARP Table Screen .........................................................................................................................243 Chapter 23 Routing Table ....................................................................................................................................245 23.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................245 23.2 The Routing Table Screen .............................................................................................................245 Chapter 24 IGMP Status ......................................................................................................................................247 24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................247 24.2 The IGMP Group Status Screen ...................................................................................................247 Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics..................................................................................................................................249 25.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen ...........................................................................................................249 Chapter 26 User Account ....................................................................................................................................253 26.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................253 26.2 The User Account Screen .............................................................................................................253 Chapter 27 Remote Management........................................................................................................................255 27.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................255 27.2 The Remote MGMT Screen ..........................................................................................................255 Chapter 28 TR-069 Client.....................................................................................................................................257 28.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................257 28.2 The TR-069 Client Screen ............................................................................................................257 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 11 Table of Contents Chapter 29 TR-064................................................................................................................................................259 29.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................259 29.2 The TR-064 Screen .......................................................................................................................259 Chapter 30 Time Settings ....................................................................................................................................261 30.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................261 30.2 The Time Screen ..........................................................................................................................261 Chapter 31 E-mail Notification ............................................................................................................................265 31.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................265 31.2 The Email Notification Screen .......................................................................................................265 31.2.1 Email Notification Edit ........................................................................................................266 Chapter 32 Logs Setting .....................................................................................................................................267 32.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................267 32.2 The Log Settings Screen ...............................................................................................................267 32.2.1 Example E-mail Log ............................................................................................................268 Chapter 33 Firmware Upgrade ............................................................................................................................271 33.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................271 33.2 The Firmware Screen ....................................................................................................................271 Chapter 34 Configuration ....................................................................................................................................273 34.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................273 34.2 The Configuration Screen .............................................................................................................273 34.3 The Reboot Screen .......................................................................................................................275 Chapter 35 Diagnostic .........................................................................................................................................276 35.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................276 35.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................276 35.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................276 35.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup ...................................................................................................277 35.4 802.1ag .........................................................................................................................................278 35.5 OAM Ping Test ..............................................................................................................................279 12 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Table of Contents Chapter 36 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................281 36.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................281 36.2 Device Access and Login ..............................................................................................................282 36.3 Internet Access .............................................................................................................................283 36.4 Wireless Internet Access ...............................................................................................................285 36.5 USB Device Connection ................................................................................................................286 36.6 UPnP .............................................................................................................................................286 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address.......................................................................287 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting.......................................................................................309 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions .................................................317 Appendix D Wireless LANs..............................................................................................................327 Appendix E IPv6 ..............................................................................................................................341 Appendix F Services........................................................................................................................349 Appendix G Legal Information .........................................................................................................353 Index ..................................................................................................................................................357 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 13 Table of Contents 14 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide PART I Users Guide 15 16 CHAPTER 1 Introducing the Device 1.1 Overview The Device is a wireless VDSL router and Gigabit Ethernet gateway. It has two DSL ports and Gigabit Ethernet for super-fast Internet access over analog (POTS) telephone lines. If the DSLAM of the ISP supports bonding function, the two DSL ports on the Device can be connected to two separate telephone jacks to provide increased throughput at longer distances. The Device supports both Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). It is backward compatible with ADSL, ADSL2 and ADSL2+ in case VDSL is not available. The Device also provides IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless networking to extend the range of your existing wired network without additional wiring. The VMG4380-B10A models also include Home Phoneline VMG4380-B10A has Home Phoneline Networking Alliance (HPNA) capability. Only use firmware for your Devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your Device. The Device has a USB port used to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive. 1.2 Ways to Manage the Device Use any of the following methods to manage the Device. Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the Device using a

(supported) web browser. TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your device. 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Device Do the following things regularly to make the Device more secure and to manage the Device more effectively. Change the password. Use a password thats not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters. Write down the password and put it in a safe place. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 17 Chapter 1 Introducing the Device Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the Device to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the Device. You could simply restore your last configuration. 1.4 Applications for the Device Here are some example uses for which the Device is well suited. 1.4.1 Internet Access Your Device provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. You can have multiple WAN services over one ADSL or VDSL. The Device cannot work in ADSL and VDSL mode at the same time. Note: The ADSL and VDSL lines share the same WAN (layer-2) interfaces that you configure in the Device. Refer to Section 6.2 on page 78 for the Network Setting

> Broadband screen. Computers can connect to the Devices LAN ports (or wirelessly). Figure 1 Devices Internet Access Application WLAN LAN WLAN LAN WAN WAN Bridging IPoE PPPoE ADSL / VDSL Bridging PPPoE IPoE PPPoA IPoA ADSL A A You can also configure IP filtering on the Device for secure Internet access. When the IP filter is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from 18 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files. Chapter 1 Introducing the Device 1.4.2 HomePNA Models with HPNA comply with HomePNA (Home Phoneline Networking Alliance, also known as HPNA) 3.1, a home networking technology for carrying data over existing coaxial cables and telephone wiring. The figure below shows your Device (A) connecting to a phone line outlet for DSL Internet access and a coaxial outlet to relay Internet connectivity to other coaxial outlets in the building. The laptop

(B) connects wirelessly to the Device. The set-up box (C) connects into a coaxial outlet in another part of the house for access to online videos. Figure 2 HomePNA Application VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 19 Chapter 1 Introducing the Device 1.4.3 Devices USB Support The USB port of the Device is used for file-sharing. File Sharing Use the built-in USB 2.0 port to share files on a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive (B). You can connect one USB hard drive to the Device at a time. Use FTP to access the files on the USB device. Figure 3 USB File Sharing Application B Media Server A You can also use the Device as a media server. This lets anyone on your network play video, music, and photos from a USB device (B) connected to the Devices USB port (without having to copy them to another computer). Figure 4 USB Media Server Application B A 20 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 1.5 LEDs (Lights) The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs. Figure 5 LEDs on the Device Chapter 1 Introducing the Device None of the LEDs are on if the Device is not receiving power. Table 1 LED Descriptions LED POWER COLOR Green STATUS On DESCRIPTION The Device is receiving power and ready for use. Blinking The Device is self-testing. Red On Off The Device detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device malfunction. The Device is not receiving power. Blinking Firmware upgrade is in progress. ETHERNET LAN 1-4 Green On The Device has a successful Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network (LAN). Blinking The Device is sending or receiving data to/from the LAN. Off The Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 21 Chapter 1 Introducing the Device Table 1 LED Descriptions (continued) LED ETHERNET WAN STATUS On COLOR Green Blinking DESCRIPTION The Gigabit Ethernet connection is working. The Device is sending or receiving data to/from the Gigabit Ethernet link. DSL1,2 Green Off On There is no Gigabit Ethernet link. The ADSL line is up. Blinking The Device is initializing the ADSL line. Orange Off On The ADSL line is down. The VDSL line is up. Blinking The Device is initializing the VDSL line. INTERNET Green Off On The VDSL line is down. The Device has an IP connection but no traffic. Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the DSL connection is up. Blinking The Device is sending or receiving IP traffic. Off On There is no Internet connection or the gateway is in bridged mode. The Device recognizes a USB connection. Blinking The Device is sending/receiving data to /from the USB device connected to it. Off On Blinking Off On The Device does not detect a USB connection. The Device is connected to an HPNA-equipped device through the coaxial cable.A Data is transmitting over the HPNA cable. No HPNA device is connected. The wireless network is activated. Blinking The Device is communicating with other wireless clients. Blinking The Device is setting up a WPS connection. Off The wireless network is not activated. USB Green HPNA Green WLAN/WPS Green Green and Orange A. HPNA-equipped models only. The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to 1234. 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking). 2 To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the POWER LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the device restarts. 22 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the Device 1.6 Wireless Access The Device is a wireless Access Point (AP) for wireless clients, such as notebook computers or PDAs and iPads. It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to rely on inconvenient Ethernet cables. You can configure your wireless network in either the built-in Web Configurator, or using the WPS button. Figure 6 Wireless Access Example 1.6.1 Using the WLAN/WPS Button If the wireless network is turned off, press the WLAN/WPS button at the back of the Device for one second. Once the WLAN/WPS LED turns green, the wireless network is active. You can also use the WLAN/WPS button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between the Device and a WPS-compatible client by adding one device at a time. To activate WPS:

1 Make sure the POWER LED is on and not blinking. 2 3 Press the WLAN/WPS button for five seconds and release it. Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the Device. The WLAN/WPS LED flashes orange while the Device sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless device. 4 Once the connection is successfully made, the WLAN/WPS LED shines green. To turn off the wireless network, press the WLAN/WPS button on the front of the Device for one to five seconds. The WLAN/WPS LED turns off when the wireless network is off. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 23 Chapter 1 Introducing the Device 24 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 2 The Web Configurator 2.1 Overview The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later versions or Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions or Safari 2.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2. JavaScript (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). See Appendix C on page 317 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer. 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your Device hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide). 2 Launch your web browser. If the Device does not automatically re-direct you to the login screen, go to http://192.168.1.1. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 25 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 3 4 5 A password screen displays. To access the administrative web configurator and manage the Device, type the default username admin and password 1234 in the password screen and click Login. If advanced account security is enabled (see Section 26.2 on page 253) the number of dots that appears when you type the password changes randomly to prevent anyone watching the password field from knowing the length of your password. If you have changed the password, enter your password and click Login. Figure 7 Password Screen The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password. It is strongly recommended you change the default password. Enter a new password, retype it to confirm and click Apply; alternatively click Skip to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the password now. Figure 8 Change Password Screen The Quick Start Wizard screen appears. You can configure the Devices time zone, basic Internet access, and wireless settings. See Chapter 3 on page 33 for more information. 26 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 6 After you finished or closed the Quick Start Wizard screen, the Network Map page appears. Figure 9 Network Map Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 7 Click Status to display the Status screen, where you can view the Devices interface and system information. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 27 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 2.2 Web Configurator Layout Figure 10 Screen Layout A B C As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:

A - title bar B - main window C - navigation panel 2.2.1 Title Bar The title bar provides some icons in the upper right corner. 28 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 2 The Web Configurator The icons provide the following functions. Table 2 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar ICON DESCRIPTION Quick Start: Click this icon to open screens where you can configure the Devices time zone Internet access, and wireless settings. Logout: Click this icon to log out of the web configurator. 2.2.2 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this document. After you click Status on the Connection Status page, the Status screen is displayed. See Chapter 5 on page 72 for more information about the Status screen. If you click Virtual Device on the System Info screen, a visual graphic appears, showing the connection status of the Devices ports. The connected ports are in color and disconnected ports are gray. Figure 11 Virtual Device 2.2.3 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure Device features. The following tables describe each menu item. Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary LINK Connection Status TAB Network Setting FUNCTION This screen shows the network status of the Device and computers/

devices connected to it. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 29 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued) FUNCTION LINK Use this screen to view and configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, and other advanced properties. You can also add new WAN connections. TAB Broadband Broadband 3G Backup Advanced 8021x Wireless General Use this screen to configure 3G WAN connection. Use this screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M/Annex J, and DSL PhyR functions. Use this screen to view and configure the IEEE 802.1x settings on the Device. Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication/security settings. More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the Device. MAC Authentication Use this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless devices of certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the Device. WPS WMM WDS Others Channel Use this screen to configure and view your WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) settings. Use this screen to enable or disable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM). Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System (WDS) links to other access points. Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Use this screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results. Home Networking LAN Setup Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other advanced properties. Static DHCP UPnP Additional Subnet STB Vendor ID 5th Ethernet Port Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses. Use this screen to turn UPnP and UPnP NAT-T on or off. Use this screen to configure IP alias and public static IP. Use this screen to have the Device automatically create static DHCP entries for Set Top Box (STB) devices when they request IP addresses. Use this screen to configure the Ethernet WAN port as a LAN port. Routing Static Route Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the Device. Policy Forwarding General QoS Use this screen to configure policy routing on the Device. Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing. You can also configure the QoS rules and actions. Queue Setup Use this screen to configure QoS queues. Class Setup Use this screen to define a classifier. Policer Setup Use these screens to configure QoS policers. Monitor Use this screen to view QoS packets statistics. 30 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued) FUNCTION LINK Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world. TAB Port Forwarding NAT Applications Use this screen to configure servers behind the Device. Port Triggering Use this screen to change your Devices port triggering settings. DMZ ALG Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen. Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG. Address Mapping Use this screen to change your Devices address mapping settings. DNS DNS Entry Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes. Dynamic DNS Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address. Use this screen to map a port to a PVC or bridge group. Interface Group USB Device File Sharing Use this screen to enable file sharing via the Device. Media Server Use this screen to use the Device as a media server. Printer Server Use this screen to enable the print server on the Device and get the model name of the associated printer. Security Settings Firewall MAC Filter Parental Control Scheduler Rule General Service Use this screen to configure the security level of your firewall. Use this screen to add Internet services and configure firewall rules. Access Control Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services. DoS Use this screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. Use this screen to block or allow traffic from devices of certain MAC addresses to the Device. Use this screen to block web sites with the specific URL. Use this screen to configure the days and times when a configured restriction (such as parental control) is enforced. Certificates Local Certificates Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage certificates and certification requests. Trusted CA Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs. System Monitor Log System Log Use this screen to view the status of events that occurred to the Device. You can export or e-mail the logs. Security Log Use this screen to view the login record of the Device. You can export or e-mail the logs. Traffic Status WAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the WAN port of the Device. LAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the LAN ports of the Device. ARP Table IGMP Group Status xDSL Statistics Use this screen to view the ARP table. It displays the IP and MAC address of each DHCP connection. Use this screen to view the status of all IGMP settings on the Device. Use this screen to view the Devices xDSL traffic statistics. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 31 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued) FUNCTION LINK Maintenance TAB User Account Remote MGMT TR-069 Client TR-064 Client Time Email Notification Log Setting Firmware Upgrade Configuration Reboot Diagnostic Ping &

Traceroute &

Nslookup 802.1ag Use this screen to change user password on the Device. Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services. Use this screen to configure the Device to be managed by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS). Use this screen to enable management via TR-064 on the LAN. Use this screen to change your Devices time and date. Use this screen to configure up to two mail servers and sender addresses on the Device. Use this screen to change your Devices log settings. Use this screen to upload firmware to your device. Use this screen to backup and restore your devices configuration

(settings) or reset the factory default settings. Use this screen to reboot the Device without turning the power off. Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection. You can use Ping, TraceRoute, or Nslookup to help you identify problems. Use this screen to configure CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) MD (maintenance domain) and MA (maintenance association), perform connectivity tests and view test reports. OAM Ping Use this screen to view information to help you identify problems with the DSL connection. 32 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 3 Quick Start 3.1 Overview Use the Quick Start screens to configure the Devices time zone, basic Internet access, and wireless settings. Note: See the technical reference chapters (starting on page 69) for background information on the features in this chapter. 3.2 Quick Start Setup 1 The Quick Start Wizard appears automatically after login. Or you can click the Click Start icon in the top right corner of the web configurator to open the quick start screens. Select the time zone of the Devices location and click Next. Figure 12 Time Zone VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 33 Chapter 3 Quick Start 2 3 Enter your Internet connection information in this screen. The screen and fields to enter may vary depending on your current connection type. Click Next. Click Next. Figure 13 Internet Connection Turn the wireless LAN on or off. If you keep it on, record the security settings so you can configure your wireless clients to connect to the Device. Click Save. Figure 14 Internet Connection 4 Your Device saves your settings and attempts to connect to the Internet. 34 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 4 Tutorials 4.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to use the Devices various features. Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection, see page 35 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network, see page 38 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups, see page 44 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network, see page 47 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup, see page 50 Access the Device Using DDNS, see page 53 Configuring the MAC Address Filter, see page 55 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer, see page 56 Using the Media Server Feature, see page 57 Using the Print Server Feature, see page 62 4.2 Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection This tutorial shows you how to set up your Internet connection using the Web Configurator. If you connect to the Internet through an ADSL connection, use the information from your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to configure the Device. Be sure to contact your service provider for any information you need to configure the Broadband screens. Click Network Setting > Broadband to open the following screen. Click Add New WAN Interface. In this example, the DSL connection has the following information. General Name Type MyDSLConnection ADSL 1 2 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 35 Chapter 4 Tutorials Connection Mode Encapsulation IPv6/IPv4 Mode ATM PVC Configuration VPI/VCI Routing PPPoE IPv4 36/48 Encapsulation Mode LLC/SNAP-Bridging Service Category UBR without PCR Account Information PPP User Name PPP Password 1234@DSL-Ex.com ABCDEF!

PPPoE Service Name MyDSL Static IP Address 192.168.1.32 Others PPPoE Passthrough: Disabled NAT: Enabled IGMP Multicast Proxy: Enabled Apply as Default Gateway: Enabled 3 4 5 6 Select the Active check box. Enter the General and ATM PVC Configuration settings as provided above. Set the Type to ADSL over ATM. Choose the Encapsulation specified by your DSL service provider. For this example, the service provider requires a username and password to establish Internet connection. Therefore, select PPPoE as the WAN encapsulation type. Set the IPv6/IPv4 Mode to IPv4 Only. Enter the account information provided to you by your DSL service provider. Configure this rule as your default Internet connection by selecting the Apply as Default Gateway check box. Then select DNS as Static and enter the DNS server addresses provided to you, such as 192.168.5.2 (DNS server1)/192.168.5.1 (DNS server2). Leave the rest of the fields to the default settings. 36 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 7 Click Apply to save your settings. Chapter 4 Tutorials VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 37 Chapter 4 Tutorials 8 You should see a summary of your new DSL connection setup in the Broadband screen as follows. Try to connect to a website to see if you have correctly set up your Internet connection. Be sure to contact your service provider for any information you need to configure the WAN screens. 4.3 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network Thomas wants to set up a wireless network so that he can use his notebook to access the Internet. In this wireless network, the Device serves as an access point (AP), and the notebook is the wireless client. The wireless client can access the Internet through the AP. Thomas has to configure the wireless network settings on the Device. Then he can set up a wireless network using WPS (Section 4.3.2 on page 40) or manual configuration (Section 4.3.3 on page 43). 4.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings This example uses the following parameters to set up a wireless network. SSID Security Mode Example WPA-PSK Pre-Shared Key DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork 802.11 Mode 802.11b/g/n Mixed 38 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 1 Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level and WPA-PSK as the security mode. Configure the screen using the provided parameters (see page 38). Click Apply. Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 Go to the Wireless > Others screen and select 802.11b/g/n Mixed in the 802.11 Mode field. Click Apply. Thomas can now use the WPS feature to establish a wireless connection between his notebook and the Device (see Section 4.3.2 on page 40). He can also use the notebooks wireless client to search for the Device (see Section 4.3.3 on page 43). VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 39 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4.3.2 Using WPS This section shows you how to set up a wireless network using WPS. It uses the Device as the AP and ZyXEL NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to the notebook. Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter or PCMCIA card). There are two WPS methods to set up the wireless client settings:

Push Button Configuration (PBC) - simply press a button. This is the easier of the two methods. PIN Configuration - configure a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the Device. A wireless client must also use the same PIN in order to download the wireless network settings from the Device. Push Button Configuration (PBC) 1 Make sure that your Device is turned on and your notebook is within the cover range of the wireless signal. 2 Make sure that you have installed the wireless client driver and utility in your notebook. 3 4 In the wireless client utility, go to the WPS setting page. Enable WPS and press the WPS button

(Start or WPS button). Push and hold the WPS button located on the Devices front panel for more than 5 seconds. Alternatively, you may log into Devices web configurator and go to the Network Setting >

Wireless > WPS screen. Enable the WPS function and click Apply. Then click the Connect button. 40 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Note: Your Device has a WPS button located on its front panel as well as a WPS button in its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function: you can use one or the other. Note: It doesnt matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one. The Device sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the Device securely. The following figure shows you an example of how to set up a wireless network and its security by pressing a button on both Device and wireless client. Example WPS Process: PBC Method Wireless Client Device WLAN/

WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES Press and hold for 5 seconds SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 41 Chapter 4 Tutorials PIN Configuration When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both the Devices web configurator and the wireless clients utility. 1 2 Launch your wireless clients configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number. Log into Devices web configurator and go to the Network Setting > Wireless > WPS screen. Enable the WPS function and click Apply. 3 Enter the PIN number of the wireless client and click the Register button. Activate WPS function on the wireless client utility screen within two minutes. The Device authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the Device securely. 42 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide The following figure shows you how to set up a wireless network and its security on a Device and a wireless client by using PIN method. Example WPS Process: PIN Method Wireless Client ZyXEL Device Chapter 4 Tutorials WITHIN 2 MINUTES Authentication by PIN SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION 4.3.3 Without WPS Use the wireless adapters utility installed on the notebook to search for the Example SSID. Then enter the DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork pre-shared key to establish an wireless Internet connection. Note: The Device supports IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g wireless clients. Make sure that your notebook or computers wireless adapter supports one of these standards. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 43 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4.4 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups Company A wants to create different wireless network groups for different types of users as shown in the following figure. Each group has its own SSID and security mode. Company VIP Guest Employees in Company A will use a general Company wireless network group. Higher management level and important visitors will use the VIP group. Visiting guests will use the Guest group, which has a lower security mode. Company A will use the following parameters to set up the wireless network groups. SSID COMPANY Company Security Level More Secure Security Mode WPA2-PSK Pre-Shared Key ForCompanyOnly VIP VIP More Secure WPA2-PSK ForVIPOnly GUEST Guest Basic Static WEP Guest12345678 44 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 1 Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Use this screen to set up the companys general wireless network group. Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply. Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 Click Network Setting > Wireless > More AP to open the following screen. Click the Edit icon to configure the second wireless network group. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 45 Chapter 4 Tutorials 3 Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply. 4 In the More AP screen, click the Edit icon to configure the third wireless network group. 46 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 5 Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply. Chapter 4 Tutorials 6 Check the status of VIP and Guest in the More AP screen. The yellow bulbs signify that the SSIDs are active and ready for wireless access. 4.5 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may connect a router to the Devices LAN. The router may be used to separate two department networks. This tutorial shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings. In the following figure, router R is connected to the Devices LAN. R connects to two networks, N1

(192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If you want to send traffic from computer A (in N1 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 47 Chapter 4 Tutorials network) to computer B (in N2 network), the traffic is sent to the Devices WAN default gateway by default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic. N1 A R N2 B You need to specify a static routing rule on the Device to specify R as the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the Device routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B. N1 A R N2 B This tutorial uses the following example IP settings:

Table 4 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE / COMPUTER The Devices WAN IP ADDRESS 172.16.1.1 The Devices LAN IP Type Use Interface A Rs N1 192.168.1.1 IPv4 ADSL/atm0 192.168.1.34 192.168.1.253 48 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Table 4 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE / COMPUTER Rs N2 IP ADDRESS 192.168.10.2 B 192.168.10.33 To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:

Log into the Devices Web Configurator in advanced mode. Click Network Setting > Routing. Click Add new static route in the Static Route screen. Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings:

4a 4b 4c 4d 4e Select the Active check box. Enter the Route Name as R. Set IP Type to IPv4. Type 192.168.10.0 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination, N2. Select Enable in the Use Gateway IP Address field. Type 192.168.1.253 (Rs N1 address) in the Gateway IP Address field. Select ADSL/atm0 as the Use Interface. 1 2 3 4 4a Click OK. Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally configure Bs firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 49 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4.6 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen. Lets say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office. You want to prioritize e-mail traffic because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour. You also upload data files (such as logs and e-mail archives) to the FTP server throughout the day. Your colleagues use the Internet for research, as well as chat applications for communicating with other branch offices. In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission bandwidth of 10,000 kbps. For this example, you want to configure QoS so that e-mail traffic gets the highest priority with at least 5,000 kbps. You can do the following:

Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue (1) to e-mail traffic going to the WAN interface, so that e-mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion. Note the IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) and/or MAC address (AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF for example) of your computer and map it to queue 7. Note: QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the Device. Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the Device. QoS Example DSL 10,000 kbps Your computer IP=192.168.1.23 and/or MAC=AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF Email traffic: Highest priority A colleagues computer Other traffic: Automatic classifier 50 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 1 2 Click Network Setting > QoS > General and select Enable. Set your WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth to 10,000 kbps (or leave this blank to have the Device automatically determine this figure). Click Apply. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS Chapter 4 Tutorials Click Queue Setup > Add new Queue to create a new queue. In the screen that opens, check Active and enter or select the following values:

Name: E-mail Interface: WAN Priority: 1 (High) Weight: 8 Rate Limit: 5,000 (kbps) Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 51 Chapter 4 Tutorials 3 Click Class Setup > Add new Classifier to create a new class. Check Active and follow the settings as shown in the screen below. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Class Setup Class Name Give a class name to this traffic, such as E-mail in this example. From Interface This is the interface from which the traffic will be coming from. Select LAN1 for this example. Ether Type Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP address or MAC address. IP Address Type the IP address of your computer - 192.168.1.23. Type the IP Subnet Mask if you know it. MAC Address Type the MAC address of your computer - AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF. Type the MAC Mask if you know it. To Queue Index Link this to an item in the Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup screen, which is the E-

mail queue created in this example. 52 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials This maps e-mail traffic coming from port 25 to the highest priority, which you have created in the previous screen (see the IP Protocol field). This also maps your computers IP address and MAC address to the E-mail queue (see the Source fields). 4 Verify that the queue setup works by checking Network Setting > QoS > Monitor. This shows the bandwidth allotted to e-mail traffic compared to other network traffic. 4.7 Access the Device Using DDNS If you connect your Device to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address, it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet. The Devices WAN IP address changes dynamically. Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows you to access the Device using a domain name. http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org A a.b.c.d w.x.y.z To use this feature, you have to apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org. This tutorial covers:

Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org Configuring DDNS on Your Device Testing the DDNS Setting Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use DDNS. 4.7.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org 1 Open a browser and type http://www.dyndns.org. 2 3 4 Apply for a user account. This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and password. Log into www.dyndns.org using your account. Add a new DDNS host name. This tutorial uses the following settings as an example. Hostname: zyxelrouter.dyndns.org Service Type: Host with IP address IP Address: Enter the WAN IP address that your Device is currently using. You can find the IP address on the Devices Web Configurator Status page. Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the Device later. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 53 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4.7.2 Configuring DDNS on Your Device Configure the following settings in the Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS screen. Select Enable Dynamic DNS. Select www.DynDNS.com as the service provider. Type zyxelrouter.dyndns.org in the Host Name field. Enter the user name (UserName1) and password (12345). Click Apply. 4.7.3 Testing the DDNS Setting Now you should be able to access the Device from the Internet. To test this:

1 Open a web browser on the computer (using the IP address a.b.c.d) that is connected to the Internet. 2 3 Type http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org and press [Enter]. The Devices login page should appear. You can then log into the Device and manage it. 54 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials 4.8 Configuring the MAC Address Filter Thomas noticed that his daughter Josephine spends too much time surfing the web and downloading media files. He decided to prevent Josephine from accessing the Internet so that she can concentrate on preparing for her final exams. Josephines computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the Device. Thomas decides to use the Security > MAC Filter screen to grant wireless network access to his computer but not to Josephines computer. Thomas Josephine 1 2 Click Security > MAC Filter to open the MAC Filter screen. Select the Enable check box to activate MAC filter function. Select Allow. Then enter the host name and MAC address of Thomas computer in this screen. Click Apply. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 55 Chapter 4 Tutorials Thomas can also grant access to the computers of other members of his family and friends. However, Josephine and others not listed in this screen will no longer be able to access the Internet through the Device. 4.9 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer Here is how to use an FTP program to access a file storage device connected to the Devices USB port. Note: This example uses the FileZilla FTP program to browse your shared files. 1 In FileZilla enter the IP address of the Device (the default is 192.168.1.1), your accounts user name and password and port 21 and click Quickconnect. A screen asking for password authentication appears. File Sharing via Windows Explorer 2 Once you log in the USB device displays in the mnt folder. 56 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials 4.10 Using the Media Server Feature Use the media server feature to play files on a computer or on your television (using DMA-2500). This section shows you how the media server feature works using the following media clients:

Microsoft (MS) Windows Media Player Media Server works with Windows Vista and Windows 7. Make sure your computer is able to play media files (music, videos and pictures). ZyXEL DMA-2500, a digital media adapter You need to set up the DMA-2500 to work with your television (TV). Refer to the DMA-2500 Quick Start Guide for the correct hardware connections. Before you begin, connect the USB storage device containing the media files you want to play to the USB port of your Device. 4.10.1 Configuring the Device Note: The Media Server feature is enabled by default. To use your Device as a media server, click Network Setting > Home Networking > Media Server. Tutorial: USB Services > Media Server Check Enable Media Server and click Apply. This enables DLNA-compliant media clients to play the video, music and image files in your USB storage device. 4.10.2 Using Windows Media Player This section shows you how to play the media files on the USB storage device connected to your Device using Windows Media Player. Tutorial: Media Server Setup (Using Windows Media Player) USB Storage Device Computer with Windows Media Player ZyXEL Device VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 57 Chapter 4 Tutorials Windows Vista 1 Open Windows Media Player and click Library > Media Sharing as follows. Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista 2 Check Find media that others are sharing in the following screen and click OK. Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista (2) 58 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 3 In the Library screen, check the left panel. The Windows Media Player should detect the Device. Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista (3) Chapter 4 Tutorials The Device displays as a playlist. Clicking on the category icons in the right panel shows you the media files in the USB storage device attached to your Device. Windows 7 1 Open Windows Media Player. It should automatically detect the Device. Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows 7 (1) If you cannot see the Device in the left panel as shown above, right-click Other Libraries >

Refresh Other Libraries. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 59 Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 Select a category in the left panel and wait for Windows Media Player to connect to the Device. Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows 7 (2) 3 In the right panel, you should see a list of files available in the USB storage device. Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows 7 (2) 4.10.3 Using a Digital Media Adapter This section shows you how you can use the Device with a ZyXEL DMA-2500 to play media files stored in the USB storage device in your TV screen. Note: For this tutorial, your DMA-2500 should already be set up with the TV according to the instructions in the DMA-2500 Quick Start Guide. 60 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 1 Connect the DMA-2500 to an available LAN port in your Device. Tutorial: Media Server Setup (Using DMA) USB Storage Device Chapter 4 Tutorials DMA-2500 ZyXEL Device Turn on the TV and wait for the DMA-2500 Home screen to appear. Using the remote control, go to MyMedia to open the following screen. Select the Device as your media server. Tutorial: Media Sharing using DMA-2500 The screen shows you the list of available media files in the USB storage device. Select the file you want to open and push the Play button in the remote control. Tutorial: Media Sharing using DMA-2500 (2) 2 3 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 61 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4.11 Using the Print Server Feature The Device allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN. You can do this by connecting a USB printer to one of the USB ports on the Device and then adding the printer on the computers connected to your network. In this section you can:

Add a New Printer Using Windows Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X Add a New Printer Using Windows This example shows how to connect a printer to your Device using the Windows 7 operating system. Some menu items may look different on your operating system. 62 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 1 Click Start > Control Panel > Devices and Printers to open the Devices and Printers screen. Click Add a printer. Tutorial: Printers Folder Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 The Add Printer wizard screen displays. Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer. Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Welcome VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 63 Chapter 4 Tutorials 3 Click The printer that I want isnt listed. Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Welcome 64 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 4 Select the Select a shared printer by name option. Enter the URL for your printer, http://

192.168.1.1:631/printers/USB_PRINTER, in this example. This URL can be found in the Devices Web Configurator on the Network Setting > USB Service > Printer Server screen. Click Next. Tutorial: Add Printer Wizard: Welcome Chapter 4 Tutorials 5 6 1 Install the printer driver. Please check the Windows CD if it includes the printer driver. If not, please install the driver from the CD included with your printer or by downloading it from the printer vendors website. After the printer driver installs successfully, choose if you want to set this printer to be the default. Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X Complete the following steps to set up a print server driver on your Macintosh computer. Click the Print Center icon located in the Macintosh Dock (a place holding a series of icons/

shortcuts at the bottom of the desktop). Proceed to step 6 to continue. If the Print Center icon is not in the Macintosh Dock, proceed to the next step. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 65 Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 On your desktop, double-click the Macintosh HD icon to open the Macintosh HD window. Tutorial: Macintosh HD 3 Double-click the Applications folder. Tutorial: Macintosh HD folder 4 Double-click the Utilities folder. Tutorial: Applications Folder 5 Double-click the Print Center icon. Tutorial: Utilities Folder 6 Click the Add icon at the top of the screen. Tutorial: Printer List Folder 7 Set up your printer in the Printer List configuration screen. Select IP Printing from the drop-

down list box. 66 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials 8 In the Printers Address field, type the IP address of your Device. 9 Deselect the Use default queue on server check box. 10 Type LP1 in the Queue Name field. 11 Select your Printer Model from the drop-down list box. If the printer's model is not listed, select Generic. Tutorial: Printer Configuration 12 Click Add to select a printer model, save and close the Printer List configuration screen. Tutorial: Printer Model 13 The Name LP1 on 192.168.1.1 displays in the Printer List field. The default printer Name displays in bold type. Tutorial: Print Server VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 67 Chapter 4 Tutorials Your Macintosh print server driver setup is complete. You can now use the Devices print server to print from a Macintosh computer. 68 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide PART II Technical Reference 69 70 CHAPTER 5 Network Map and Status Screens 5.1 Overview After you log into the Web Configurator, the Network Map screen appears. This shows the network connection status of the Device and clients connected to it. You can use the Status screen to look at the current status of the Device, system resources, and interfaces (LAN, WAN, and WLAN). 5.2 The Network Map Screen Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients. A warning message appears if there is a connection problem. If you prefer to view the status in a list, click List View in the Viewing Mode selection box. You can configure how often you want the Device to update this screen in Refresh Interval. Figure 15 Network Map: Icon Mode Figure 16 Network Map: List Mode VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 71 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens In Icon Mode, if you want to view information about a client, click the clients name and Info. Click the IP address if you want to change it. If you want to change the name or icon of the client, click Change icon/name. In List Mode, you can also view the clients information. 5.3 The Status Screen Use this screen to view the status of the Device. Click Status to open this screen. Figure 17 Status Screen 72 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens Each field is described in the following table. Table 5 Status Screen LABEL Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen. DESCRIPTION Device Information Host Name This field displays the Device system name. It is used for identification. Model Number Firmware Version This shows the model number of your Device. This is the current version of the firmware inside the Device. WAN Information (These fields display when you have a WAN connection.) WAN Type This field displays the current WAN connection type. MAC Address This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your Device. IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the Device in the WAN. Click Release to release your IP address to 0.0.0.0. If you want to renew your IP address, click Renew. IP Subnet Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN. Encapsulation This field displays the current encapsulation method. LAN Information IP Address This is the current IP address of the Device in the LAN. IP Subnet Mask This is the current subnet mask in the LAN. DHCP This field displays what DHCP services the Device is providing to the LAN. Choices are:

Server - The Device is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN. Relay - The Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. None - The Device is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN. This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your Device. MAC Address WLAN Information MAC Address Status SSID Channel Security 802.11 Mode WPS Security This shows the wireless adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your Device. This displays whether WLAN is activated. This is the descriptive name used to identify the Device in a wireless LAN. This is the channel number used by the Device now. This displays the type of security mode the Device is using in the wireless LAN. This displays the type of 802.11 mode the Device is using in the wireless LAN. This displays whether WPS is activated. Firewall This displays the firewalls current security level. System Status System Up Time This field displays how long the Device has been running since it last started up. The Device starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Maintenance > Reboot), or when you reset it. Current Date/Time This field displays the current date and time in the Device. You can change this in Maintenance> Time Setting. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 73 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens Table 5 Status Screen (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION System Resource CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the Devices processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the Device is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using QoS; see Chapter 10 on page 159). Memory Usage This field displays what percentage of the Devices memory is currently used. Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%, the Device is probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See Section 34.2 on page 273, or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few seconds. 74 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 6 Broadband 6.1 Overview This chapter discusses the Devices Broadband screens. Use these screens to configure your Device for Internet access. A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks, such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations. Figure 18 LAN and WAN WAN 3G (third generation) standards for the sending and receiving of voice, video, and data in a mobile environment. You can attach a 3G wireless adapter to the USB port and set the Device to use this 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails. Figure 19 3G WAN Connection 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Broadband screen to view, remove or add a WAN interface. You can also configure the WAN settings on the Device for Internet access (Section 6.2 on page 78). Use the 3G Backup screen to configure 3G WAN connection (Section 6.3 on page 86). VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 75 Chapter 6 Broadband Use the Advanced screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M/Annex J, and DSL PhyR functions (Section 6.4 on page 90). Use the 8021x screen to view and configure the IEEE 802.1x settings on the Device (Section 6.5 on page 92). Table 6 WAN Setup Overview LAYER-2 INTERFACE CONNECTION DSL LINK TYPE N/A ADSL/VDSL over PTM INTERNET CONNECTION MODE ENCAPSULATION CONNECTION SETTINGS Routing PPPoE ADSL over ATM EoA Bridge Routing IPoE N/A PPPoE/PPP0A IPoE/IPoA PPP information, IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU VLAN and QoS ATM PCV configuration, PPP information, IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU ATM PCV configuration, IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU Bridge N/A ATM PCV configuration, and QoS 6.1.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet), they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user authentication. WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the Device, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the Device to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the Device tries to access the Internet. If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es). ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is a WAN networking technology that provides high-speed data transfer. ATM uses fixed-size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS (Quality of 76 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 6 Broadband Service) can be guaranteed. ATM uses a connection-oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit

(VC) between Finding Out More PTM Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) is packet-oriented and supported by the VDSL2 standard. In PTM, packets are encapsulated directly in the High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) frames. It is designed to provide a low-overhead, transparent way of transporting packets over DSL links, as an alternative to ATM. 3G 3G (Third Generation) is a digital, packet-switched wireless technology. Bandwidth usage is optimized as multiple users share the same channel and bandwidth is only allocated to users when they send data. It allows fast transfer of voice and non-voice data and provides broadband Internet access to mobile devices. IPv6 Introduction IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses. The Device can use IPv4/IPv6 dual stack to connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks, and supports IPv6 rapid deployment (6RD). IPv6 Addressing The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:

Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15. IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the network address. The prefix length is written as /x where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 77 Chapter 6 Broadband IPv6 Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each blocks 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000. 6.1.3 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this information from your ISP. 6.2 The Broadband Screen Use this screen to change your Devices Internet access settings. Click Network Setting >

Broadband from the menu. The summary table shows you the configured WAN services

(connections) on the Device. Figure 20 Network Setting > Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 7 Network Setting > Broadband LABEL Add new WAN Interface DESCRIPTION Click this button to create a new connection.

Name Type Mode This is the index number of the entry. This is the service name of the connection. This shows whether it is an ATM, PTM, or Ethernet connection. This shows whether the connection is in routing or bridge mode. Encapsulation This is the method of encapsulation used by this connection. 802.1p 802.1q This indicates the 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This displays N/A when there is no priority level assigned. This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This displays N/A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned. IGMP Proxy This shows whether the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. NAT Default Gateway IPv6 This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection. This shows whether the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. This shows whether IPv6 is activated or not for this connection. IPv6 is not available when the connection uses the bridging service. 78 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 6 Broadband Table 7 Network Setting > Broadband (continued) LABEL MLD Proxy DESCRIPTION This shows whether Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is activated or not for this connection. MLD is not available when the connection uses the bridging service. Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection. Click the Delete icon to remove the WAN connection. 6.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection Click Add new WAN Interface in the Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to an existing WAN interface to configure a WAN connection. The screen varies depending on the interface type, mode, encapsulation, and IPv6/IPv4 mode you select. 6.2.1.1 Routing Mode Use Routing mode if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. The following example screen displays when you select the ADSL over ATM connection type, Routing mode, and PPPoE encapsulation. The screen varies when you select other interface type, encapsulation, and IPv6/IPv4 mode. Figure 21 Routing Mode VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 79 Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 8 Routing Mode LABEL General DESCRIPTION Active Name Type Mode Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings. Specify a descriptive name for this connection. Select whether it is an ADSL/VDSL over PTM or ADSL over ATM connection. Select Routing if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. This option is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field. The choices depend on the connection type you selected. If your connection type is ADSL/

VDSL over PTM, the choices are PPPoE and IPoE. If your connection type is ADSL over ATM, the choices are PPPoE, PPPoA, IPoE and IPoA. IPv6/IPv4 Mode Select IPv4 Only if you want the Device to run IPv4 only. Select IPv6/IPv4 DualStack to allow the Device to run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time. Select IPv6 Only if you want the Device to run IPv6 only. ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL over ATM.) VPI VCI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. DSL Link Type This field is not editable. The selection depends on the setting in the Encapsulation field. EoA (Ethernet over ATM) uses an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can have multiple services/connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP (IPoE), PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging encapsulation methods. PPPoA (PPP over ATM) allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC. IPoA (IP over ATM) allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC. Encapsulation Mode Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices are:

LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. This is available only when you select IPoE or PPPoE in the Select DSL Link Type field. VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit

(VC). To transport multiple protocols, the Device needs separate VCs. There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit (PDU) payload. LLC/ENCAPSULATION: More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC. This is available only when you select PPPoA in the Encapsulation field. LLC/SNAP-ROUTING: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs. The LCC header can be followed by an IEEE 802.1a SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header. This is available only when you select IPoA in the Encapsulation field. 80 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 6 Broadband Table 8 Routing Mode (continued) LABEL Service Category DESCRIPTION Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate

(PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here.This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR. Sustainable Cell Rate The Sustainable Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. PPP Information PPP User Name This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. This is available only when you select PPPoE or PPPoA in the Mode field. Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given. PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above. PPP Auto Connect IDLE Timeout PPPoE Service Name PPPoE Passthrough Select this option if you do not want the connection to time out. This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server. This field is not configurable if you select PPP Auto Connect. Enter the name of your PPPoE service here. This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation. In addition to the Devices built-in PPPoE client, you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the Device. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address. PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate. Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP. IP Address This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6/IPv4 DualStack in the IPv6/

IPv4 Mode field. Obtain an IP Address Automatically A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed;

the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select this if you have a dynamic IP address. Static IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 81 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 8 Routing Mode (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP. Gateway IP Address Routing Feature This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6/IPv4 DualStack in the IPv6/

IPv4 Mode field. NAT Enable Select this option to activate NAT on this connection. IGMP Proxy Enable Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Select this option to have the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This allows the Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6/IPv4 DualStack in the IPv6/

IPv4 Mode field. Apply as Default Gateway DNS Server DNS Select Dynamic if you want the Device use the DNS server addresses assigned by your ISP. Select Static if you want the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually. DNS Server 1 Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP. DNS Server 2 Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP. IPv6 Address IPv6 Address This is available only when you select IPv6/IPv4 DualStack or IPv6 Only in the IPv6/

IPv4 Mode field. Select Automatic if you want to have the Device use the IPv6 prefix from the connected routers Router Advertisement (RA) to generate an IPv6 address. Select the Get IPv6 Address From DHCPv6 Server checkbox if you want to obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priority over the IP address automatically generated by the Device using the IPv6 prefix from an RA. This option is available only when you choose to get your IPv6 address automatically. Select Static if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP. Enter the IPv6 address assigned by your ISP. Enter the address prefix length to specify how many most significant bits in an IPv6 address compose the network address. Enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your Device's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. You can enable IPv6 routing features in the following section. Select this checkbox to have the Device act as an MLD proxy on this connection. This allows the Device to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. Configure the IPv6 DNS server in the following section. WAN IPv6 Address Prefix Length Next Hop IPv6 Routing Feature MLD Proxy Enable Apply as Default Gateway IPv6 DNS Server 82 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 6 Broadband Table 8 Routing Mode (continued) LABEL IPv6 DNS DESCRIPTION Select Dynamic to have the Device get the IPv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically. Select Static to have the Device use the IPv6 DNS server addresses you configure manually. Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP. These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL/VDSL over PTM. Select this option to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this connection. IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection. Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this connection. IPv6 DNS Server 1 IPv6 DNS Server 2 VLAN Active 802.1p 802.1q QoS Rate Limit MTU MTU Size Enter the MTU (Maximum Transfer Unit) size for this traffic. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 6.2.1.2 Bridge Mode Click the Add new WAN Interface in the Network Setting > Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to the connection you want to configure. Select Bridge as the encapsulation mode. The screen varies depending on the interface type you select. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 83 Chapter 6 Broadband If you select ADSL/VDSL over PTM as the interface type, the following screen appears. Figure 22 Bridge Mode (ADSL/VDSL over PTM) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 9 Bridge Mode (ADSL/VDSL over PTM) LABEL General DESCRIPTION Active Name Type Mode VLAN Active 802.1p 802.1q QoS Rate Limit Apply Cancel Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings. Enter a service name of the connection. Select ADSL/VDSL over PTM as the interface that you want to configure. The Device uses the VDSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s). This section is available only when you select ADSL/VDSL over PTM in the Type field. Select this to add the VLAN Tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this connection. IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. Type the VLAN ID number (from 0 to 4094) for traffic through this connection. Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this connection. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 84 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide If you select ADSL over ATM as the interface type, the following screen appears. Figure 23 Bridge Mode (ADSL over ATM) Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 10 Bridge Mode (ADSL over ATM) LABEL General DESCRIPTION Active Name Type Mode Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings. Enter a service name of the connection. Select ADSL over ATM as the interface for which you want to configure here. The Device uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s). ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL over ATM.) VPI VCI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. DSL Link Type This field is not editable. The selection depends on the setting in the Encapsulation field. EoA (Ethernet over ATM) uses an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can have multiple services/connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP (IPoE), PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging encapsulation methods. PPPoA (PPP over ATM) allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC. IPoA (IP over ATM) allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 85 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 10 Bridge Mode (ADSL over ATM) (continued) LABEL Encapsulation Mode DESCRIPTION Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices are:

LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. This is available only when you select IPoE or PPPoE in the Select DSL Link Type field. VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit

(VC). To transport multiple protocols, the Device needs separate VCs. There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit (PDU) payload. LLC/ENCAPSULATION: More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC. This is available only when you select PPPoA in the Encapsulation field. LLC/SNAP-ROUTING: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs. The LCC header can be followed by an IEEE 802.1a SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header. This is available only when you select IPoA in the Encapsulation field. Service Category Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate

(PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here.This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR. Sustainable Cell Rate The Sustainable Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR. QoS Rate Limit Apply Cancel Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this connection. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 6.3 The 3G Backup Screen Use this screen to configure your 3G settings. Click Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup. 86 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Note: The actual data rate you obtain varies depending the 3G card you use, the signal strength to the service providers base station, and so on. Figure 24 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup Chapter 6 Broadband VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 87 Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 11 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup LABEL General DESCRIPTION 3G Backup Ping Check Select Enable to have the Device use the 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails. Select Enable if you want the Device to ping check the connection status of your WAN. You can configure the frequency of the ping check and number of consecutive failures before triggering 3G backup. Check Cycle Enter the frequency of the ping check in this field. Consecutive Fail Ping Default Gateway Ping the Host Enter how many consecutive failures are required before 3G backup is triggered. Select this to have the Device ping the WAN interfaces default gateway IP address. Select this to have the Device ping the particular host name or IP address you typed in this field. 3G Connection Settings Card description Username Password PIN This field displays the manufacturer and model name of your 3G card if you inserted one in the Device. Otherwise, it displays N/A. Type the user name (of up to 64 ASCII printable characters) given to you by your service provider. Type the password (of up to 64 ASCII printable characters) associated with the user name above. A PIN (Personal Identification Number) code is a key to a 3G card. Without the PIN code, you cannot use the 3G card. If your ISP enabled PIN code authentication, enter the 4-digit PIN code (0000 for example) provided by your ISP. If you enter the PIN code incorrectly, the 3G card may be blocked by your ISP and you cannot use the account to access the Internet. If your ISP disabled PIN code authentication, leave this field blank. Dial string Enter the phone number (dial string) used to dial up a connection to your service providers base station. Your ISP should provide the phone number. For example, *99# is the dial string to establish a GPRS or 3G connection in Taiwan. APN Enter the APN (Access Point Name) provided by your service provider. Connections with different APNs may provide different services (such as Internet access or MMS (Multi-Media Messaging Service)) and charge method. You can enter up to 32 ASCII printable characters. Spaces are allowed. Connection Select Nailed UP if you do not want the connection to time out. Select on Demand if you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field. Max Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the Device automatically disconnects from the ISP. Obtain an IP Address Automatically Use the following static IP address IP Address Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use the following static IP address. 88 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 6 Broadband Table 11 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued) LABEL Obtain DNS info dynamically DESCRIPTION Select this to have the Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically. Use the following static DNS IP address Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually. Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Advanced Click this to show the advanced 3G backup settings. Budget Setup Enable Budget Control Time Budget Select Enable to set a monthly limit for the user account of the installed 3G card. You can set a limit on the total traffic and/or call time. The Device takes the actions you specified when a limit is exceeded during the month. Select this and specify the amount of time (in hours) that the 3G connection can be used within one month. If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the statistics. Data Budget

(Mbytes) Select this and specify how much downstream and/or upstream data (in Mega bytes) can be transmitted via the 3G connection within one month. Select Download/Upload to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions. Select Download to set a limit on the downstream traffic (from the ISP to the Device). Select Upload to set a limit on the upstream traffic (from the Device to the ISP). If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the statistics. Data Budget

(kPackets) Select this and specify how much downstream and/or upstream data (in k Packets) can be transmitted via the 3G connection within one month. Select Download/Upload to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions. Select Download to set a limit on the downstream traffic (from the ISP to the Device). Select Upload to set a limit on the upstream traffic (from the Device to the ISP). If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the statistics. Select the date on which the Device resets the budget every month. Select last if you want the Device to reset the budget on the last day of the month. Select specific and enter the number of the date you want the Device to reset the budget Click this button to reset the time and data budgets immediately. The count starts over with the 3G connections full configured monthly time and data budgets. This does not affect the normal monthly budget restart; so if you configured the time and data budget counters to reset on the second day of the month and you use this button on the first, the time and data budget counters will still reset on the second. Specify the actions the Device takes before the time or data limit exceeds. Select Enable and enter a number from 1 to 99 in the percentage fields. If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the statistics. Reset all budget counters on Reset time and data budget counters Actions before over budget Enable % of time budget/

data budget

(Mbytes)/data budget

(kPackets) VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 89 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 11 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued) LABEL Actions when over budget DESCRIPTION Specify the actions the Device takes when the time or data limit is exceeded. Current 3G connection Select Keep to maintain an existing 3G connection or Drop to disconnect it. Enable Email Notification Select this to enable the e-mail notification function. The Device will e-mail you a notification when there over budget occurs. Mail Server Select a mail server for the e-mail address specified below. If you do not select a mail server, e-mail notifications cannot be sent via e-mail. You must have configured a mail server already in the Maintenance > Email Notification screen. Over Budget Email Title Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e-mail notifications that the Device sends. Send Notification to Email Notifications are sent to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, notifications cannot be sent via e-mail. Interval Enter the interval of how many minutes you want the Device to e-mail you. Enable Log Select this to activate the logging function at the interval you set in this field. Basic Apply Cancel Click this to hide the advanced settings of 3G backup. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration. 6.4 The Advanced Screen Use the Advanced screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M/Annex J, and DSL PhyR functions. The Device supports the PhyR retransmission scheme. PhyR is a retransmission scheme designed to provide protection against noise on the DSL line. It improves voice, video and data transmission resilience by utilizing a retransmission buffer. 90 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Click Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced to display the following screen. Figure 25 Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced (VMG1312-B10A) Chapter 6 Broadband Figure 26 Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced (VMG1312-B30A) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 12 Network Setting > Network Setting > Broadband LABEL PTM over ADSL Select Enable to use PTM over ADSL. Since PTM has less overhead than ATM, some ISPs DESCRIPTION use PTM over ADSL for better performance. Annex M Annex J PhyR US PhyR DS You can enable Annex M or Annex J for the Device to use double upstream mode to increase the maximum upstream transfer rate. Enable or disable PhyR US (upstream) for upstream transmission to the WAN. PhyR US should be enabled if data being transmitted upstream is sensitive to noise. However, enabling PhyR US can decrease the US line rate. Enabling or disabling PhyR will require the CPE to retrain. For PhyR to function, the DSLAM must also support PhyR and have it enabled. Enable or disable PhyR DS (downstream) for downstream transmission from the WAN. PhyR DS should be enabled if data being transmitted downstream is sensitive to noise. However, enabling PhyR DS can decrease the DS line rate. Enabling or disabling PhyR will require the CPE to retrain. For PhyR to function, the DSLAM must also support PhyR and have it enabled. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 91 Chapter 6 Broadband 6.5 The 8021x Screen You can view and configure the 802.1x authentication settings in the 8021x screen. Click Network Setting > Broadband > 8021x to display the following screen. Figure 27 Network Setting > Broadband > 8021x The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 13 Network Setting > Network Setting > 8021x LABEL

DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry. Status Interface EAP Identity EAP method Bidirectional Authentication Certificate This field displays whether the authentication is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this authentication is active. A gray bulb signifies that this authentication is not active. This is the interface that uses the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no interface assigned. This shows the EAP identity of the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no EAP identity assigned. This shows the EAP method used in the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no EAP method assigned. This shows whether bidirectional authentication is allowed. This shows the certificate used for this authentication. This displays N/A when there is no certificate assigned. Trusted CA This shows the Trusted CA used for this authentication. This displays N/A when there is no Trusted CA assigned. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration. 92 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 6.5.1 Edit 802.1x Settings Use this screen to edit a 802.1x authentications settings. Click the Edit icon next to the rule you want to edit. The screen shown next appears. Figure 28 802.1x: Add/Edit Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 14 802.1x: Add/Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION This field allows you to activate/deactivate the authentication. Select this to enable the authentication. Clear this to disable this authentication without having to delete the entry. Interface Select the interface that uses the authentication. EAP Identity Enter the EAP identity of the authentication. EAP method This is the EAP method used for this authentication. Enable Bidirectional Authentication Certificate Select this to allow bidirectional authentication. Select the certificate you want to assign to the authentication. You need to import the certificate in the Security > Certificates > Local Certificates screen. Trusted CA Select the Trusted CA you want to assign to the authentication. You need to import the certificate in the Security > Certificates > Trusted CA screen. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 6.6 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the Device features described in this chapter. Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The Device can work in bridge mode or routing mode. When the Device is in routing mode, it supports the following methods. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 93 Chapter 6 Broadband IP over Ethernet IP over Ethernet (IPoE) is an alternative to PPPoE. IP packets are being delivered across an Ethernet network, without using PPP encapsulation. They are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells. PPP over ATM (PPPoA) PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The Device encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service Providers (ISP) DSLAM (digital access multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP. PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. PPPoE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example RADIUS). One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the Device (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the Device does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs computers will have access. RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5

(AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit

(LLC-based multiplexing) and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit (VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information. Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP. VC-based Multiplexing 94 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 6 Broadband In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical. LLC-based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs. Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections. Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed. Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be greater than the PCR. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again. If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate. The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS. Figure 29 Example of Traffic Shaping VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 95 Chapter 6 Broadband ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0 Specification. Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution video and voice. Variable Bit Rate (VBR) The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time

(VBR-nRT) connections. The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics. The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers. Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An example application is background file transfer. IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and default gateway. Introduction to VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router. In Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building. 96 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 6 Broadband VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain. Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information), starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame). The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094. TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 Bits Multicast IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast

(1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group. At start up, the Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the Device periodically updates this information. DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 97 Chapter 6 Broadband important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The Device can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways. 1 2 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields. If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the Devices WAN IP address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP. IPv6 Addressing The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:

Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15. IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the network address. The prefix length is written as /x where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix. 98 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 7 Wireless 7.1 Overview This chapter describes the Devices Network Setting > Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your Devices wireless connection. 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter This section describes the Devices Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your Devices wireless connection. Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode (Section 7.2 on page 100). Use the More AP screen to set up multiple wireless networks on your Device (Section 7.3 on page 107). Use the MAC Authentication screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the Device (Section 7.4 on page 109). Use the WPS screen to enable or disable WPS, view or generate a security PIN (Personal Identification Number) (Section 7.5 on page 110). Use the WMM screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) to ensure quality of service in wireless networks for multimedia applications (Section 7.6 on page 112). Use the WDS screen to set up a Wireless Distribution System, in which the Device acts as a bridge with other ZyXEL access points (Section 7.7 on page 113). Use the Others screen to configure wireless advanced features, such as the RTS/CTS Threshold

(Section 7.8 on page 115). Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results

(Section 7.9 on page 117). VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 99 Chapter 7 Wireless 7.1.2 What You Need to Know Wireless Basics Wireless is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with one another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption. Finding Out More See Section 7.10 on page 117 for advanced technical information on wireless networks. 7.2 The General Screen Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode. Note: If you are configuring the Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the Devices SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the Devices new settings. 100 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Figure 30 Network Setting > Wireless > General Chapter 7 Wireless The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen. Table 15 Network Setting > Wireless > General LABEL Wireless Network Setup DESCRIPTION Wireless Band You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field. This shows the wireless band which this radio profile is using. 2.4GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless clients. Channel Set the channel depending on your particular region. Select a channel or use Auto to have the Device automatically determine a channel to use. If you are having problems with wireless interference, changing the channel may help. Try to use a channel that is as many channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs as possible. The channel number which the Device is currently using then displays next to this field. more.../less Click more... to show more information. Click less to hide them. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 101 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 15 Network Setting > Wireless > General (continued) LABEL Bandwidth DESCRIPTION Select whether the Device uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz or 40MHz. A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps. 40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal. Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding. Control Sideband This is available for some regions when you select a specific channel and set the Bandwidth field to 40MHz. Set whether the control channel (set in the Channel field) should be in the Lower or Upper range of channel bands. Passphrase Type If you set security for the wireless LAN and have the Device generate a password, the setting in this field determines how the Device generates the password. Select None to set the Devices password generation to not be based on a passphrase. Select Fixed to use a 16 character passphrase for generating a password. Select Variable to use a 16 to 63 character passphrase for generating a password. Passphrase Key For a fixed type passphrase enter 16 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no spaces). It must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive. For a variable type passphrase enter 16 to 63 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no spaces). It must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive. Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name

(SSID) Hide SSID The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Client Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each other through the Device. MBSSID/LAN Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients in other SSIDs or wired LAN devices through the Device. Enhanced Multicast Forwarding BSSID Maximum Bandwidth Security Level Security Mode Select both Client Isolation and MBSSID/LAN Isolation to allow this SSIDs wireless clients to only connect to the Internet through the Device. Select this check box to allow the Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless unicast traffic. This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the Device when wireless LAN is enabled. Specify the maximum rate for wireless traffic in kilobits per second (Kbps). Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the Device. When you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication. See the following sections for more details about this field. 102 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless Table 15 Network Setting > Wireless > General (continued) LABEL Apply DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes. Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 7.2.1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication. Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your Device, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Figure 31 Wireless > General: No Security The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 16 Wireless > General: No Security LABEL Security Level DESCRIPTION Choose No Security to allow all wireless connections without data encryption or authentication. 7.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points

(AP) to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key. Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support. For example, use WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK if all your wireless devices support it, or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices support it and you have a RADIUS server. If your wireless devices support nothing stronger than WEP, use the highest encryption level available. Your Device allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 103 Chapter 7 Wireless In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen, then select Basic as the security level. Figure 32 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 17 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP) LABEL Security Level DESCRIPTION Select Basic to enable WEP data encryption. Generate password automatically Password 1~4 Select this option to have the Device automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option. The password (WEP keys) are used to encrypt data. Both the Device and the wireless stations must use the same password (WEP key) for data transmission. If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters

("0-9", "A-F"). If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters

("0-9", "A-F"). You must configure at least one password, only one password can be activated at any one time. The default password is Passowrd 1. more.../less Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them. WEP Encryption Select 64-bits or 128-bits. This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use. 104 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless 7.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) The WPA-PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over WEP. Using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK), both the Device and the connecting client share a common password in order to validate the connection. This type of encryption, while robust, is not as strong as WPA, WPA2 or even WPA2-PSK. The WPA2-PSK security mode is a newer, more robust version of the WPA encryption standard. It offers slightly better security, although the use of PSK makes it less robust than it could be. Click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level. Then select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list. Figure 33 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 18 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK LABEL Security Level DESCRIPTION Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption. Security Mode Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box. Generate password automatically Password Select this option to have the Device automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. If you did not select Generate password automatically, you can manually type a pre-

shared key from 8 to 64 case-sensitive keyboard characters. more.../less Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them. WPA-PSK Compatible This field appears when you choose WPA-PSK2 as the Security Mode. Check this field to allow wireless devices using WPA-PSK security mode to connect to your Device. The Device supports WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK simultaneously. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 105 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 18 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK (continued) LABEL Encryption DESCRIPTION Select the encryption type (AES or TKIP+AES) for data encryption. Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES. Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES. Group Key Update Timer The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients. 7.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication The WPA2 security mode is currently the most robust form of encryption for wireless networks. It requires a RADIUS server to authenticate user credentials and is a full implementation the security protocol. Use this security option for maximum protection of your network. However, it is the least backwards compatible with older devices. The WPA security mode is a security subset of WPA2. It requires the presence of a RADIUS server on your network in order to validate user credentials. This encryption standard is slightly older than WPA2 and therefore is more compatible with older devices. Click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level. Then select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list. Figure 34 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 19 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) LABEL Security Level DESCRIPTION Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption. Security Mode Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box. Authentication Server 106 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless Table 19 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation. Enter the port number of the external authentication server. The default port number is 1812. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. IP Address Port Number Shared Secret Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the Device. The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your Device. The key is not sent over the network. more.../less Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them. WPA Compatible Encryption WPA2 Pre-

Authentication This field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the Device to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously. Select the encryption type (AES or TKIP+AES) for data encryption. Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES. Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES. This field is available only when you select WPA2. Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it. Select Enabled to turn on preauthentication in WAP2. Otherwise, select Disabled. Network Re-

auth Interval Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected. If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority. Group Key Update Timer The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients. 7.3 The More AP Screen This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets (BSSs) on the Device. Click Network Setting > Wireless > More AP. The following screen displays. Figure 35 Network Setting > Wireless > More AP VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 107 Chapter 7 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 20 Network Setting > Wireless > More AP LABEL

DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry. Status SSID This field indicates whether this SSID is active. A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active. A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active. An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the Devices BSSs. The SSID

(Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated. This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility. Security Modify This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile. Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile. 7.3.1 Edit More AP Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen. The following screen displays. Figure 36 More AP: Edit The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 21 More AP: Edit LABEL Wireless Network Setup DESCRIPTION Wireless You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field. 108 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless Table 21 More AP: Edit (continued) LABEL Passphrase Type DESCRIPTION If you set security for the wireless LAN and have the Device generate a password, the setting in this field determines how the Device generates the password. Select None to set the Devices password generation to not be based on a passphrase. Select Fixed to use a 16 character passphrase for generating a password. Select Variable to use a 16 to 63 character passphrase for generating a password. Passphrase Key For a fixed type passphrase enter 16 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no spaces). It must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive. For a variable type passphrase enter 16 to 63 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no spaces). It must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive. Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name

(SSID) Hide SSID The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Client Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each other. MBSSID/LAN Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients in other SSIDs or LAN devices. Enhanced Multicast Forwarding Maximum Bandwidth Security Level Security Mode Select this check box to allow the Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless unicast traffic. Specify the maximum rate for wireless traffic in kilobits per second (Kbps). Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the Device. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication. See Section 7.2.1 on page 103 for more details about this field. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 7.4 MAC Authentication This screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to specific devices

(Allow) or exclude specific devices from accessing the ZyXEL Device (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 109 Chapter 7 Wireless Use this screen to view your Devices MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules. Click Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication. The screen appears as shown. Figure 37 Wireless > MAC Authentication The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 22 Wireless > MAC Authentication LABEL SSID MAC Restrict Mode Select Disable to turn off MAC filtering. DESCRIPTION Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings. Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table. Select Deny to block access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the Device. Select Allow to permit access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the Device. Click this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below. Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. Add new MAC address

This is the index number of the entry. MAC Address This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the Device. Modify Apply Cancel Click the Delete icon to delete the entry. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 7.5 The WPS Screen Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your Device. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both devices must support WPS. See Section 7.10.9.3 on page 126 for more information about WPS. 110 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless Note: The Device applies the security settings of the SSID1 profile (see Section 7.2 on page 100). If you want to use the WPS feature, make sure you have set the security mode of SSID1 to WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK or No Security. Click Network Setting > Wireless > WPS. The following screen displays. Select Enable and click Apply to activate the WPS function. Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen. Figure 38 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 23 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS LABEL WPS DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate WPS on the Device. Method 1 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration (PBC). Connect Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the Device) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device, or a menu button similar to the Connect button on this screen. Note: You must press the other wireless devices WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button. Method 2 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the client into the Device. Register Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network. You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the devices settings. Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the Device. Method 3 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the Device into the client. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 111 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 23 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION The default WPS status is configured. Release Configuratio n Generate New PIN Number Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the Device. The PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the Device is shown here. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS. The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method. Click the Generate New PIN Number button to have the Device create a new PIN. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 7.6 The WMM Screen Use this screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) and WMM Power Save in wireless networks for multimedia applications. Click Network Setting > Wireless > WMM. The following screen displays. Figure 39 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 24 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM LABEL WMM DESCRIPTION Select On to have the Device automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly. WMM Automatic Power Save Delivery Select this option to extend the battery life of your mobile devices (especially useful for small devices that are running multimedia applications). The Device goes to sleep mode to save power when it is not transmitting data. The AP buffers the packets sent to the Device until the Device "wakes up". The Device wakes up periodically to check for incoming data. Note: Note: This works only if the wireless device to which the Device is connected also supports this feature. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 112 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 7.7 The WDS Screen Chapter 7 Wireless An AP using the Wireless Distribution System (WDS) can function as a wireless network bridge allowing you to wirelessly connect two wired network segments. The WDS screen allows you to configure the Device to connect to two or more APs wirelessly when WDS is enabled. Use this screen to set up your WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links between the Device and other wireless APs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made. Note: WDS security is independent of the security settings between the Device and any wireless clients. Note: At the time of writing, WDS is compatible with other ZyXEL APs only. Not all models support WDS links. Check your other APs documentation. Click Network Setting > Wireless > WDS. The following screen displays. Figure 40 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 25 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS LABEL Wireless Bridge Setup DESCRIPTION AP Mode Select the operating mode for your Device. Access Point - The Device functions as a bridge and access point simultaneously. Wireless Bridge - The Device acts as a wireless network bridge and establishes wireless links with other APs. In this mode, clients cannot connect to the Device wirelessly. Bridge Restrict This field is available only when you set operating mode to Access Point. Select Enabled to turn on WDS and enter the peer devices MAC address manually in the table below. Select Disable to turn off WDS. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 113 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 25 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS (continued) LABEL Remote Bridge MAC Address DESCRIPTION You can enter the MAC address of the peer device by clicking the Edit icon under Modify.

This is the index number of the entry. MAC Address This shows the MAC address of the peer device. You can connect to up to 4 peer devices. Modify Scan Apply Cancel Click the Edit icon and type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address format (six hexadecimal character pairs, for example 12:34:56:78:9a:bc). Click the Delete icon to remove this entry. Click the Scan icon to search and display the available APs within range. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 7.7.1 WDS Scan You can click the Scan icon in Wireless > WDS to have the Device automatically search and display the available APs within range. Select an AP and click Apply to have the Device establish a wireless link with the selected wireless device. Figure 41 WDS: Scan The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 26 WDS: Scan LABEL Wireless Bridge Scan Setup DESCRIPTION Refresh

SSID BSSID Apply Cancel Click Refresh to update the table. This is the index number of the entry. This shows the SSID of the available wireless device within range. This shows the MAC address of the available wireless device within range. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 114 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless 7.8 The Others Screen Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Click Network Setting > Wireless >

Others. The screen appears as shown. See Section 7.10.2 on page 119 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen. Figure 42 Network Setting > Wireless > Others The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 27 Network Setting > Wireless > Others LABEL RTS/CTS Threshold DESCRIPTION Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS

(Clear To Send) handshake. Enter a value between 0 and 2347. Fragmentation Threshold This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and 2346. Auto Channel Timer Output Power If you set the channel to Auto in the Network Setting > Wireless > General screen, specify the interval in minutes for how often the Device scans for the best channel. Enter 0 to disable the periodical scan. Set the output power of the Device. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% or 100%. Beacon Interval When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval. This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again. DTIM Interval The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low power mode before waking up to handle the beacon. This value can be set from20ms to 1000ms. A high value helps save current consumption of the access point. Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Power Saving mode. A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This value can be set from 1 to 100. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 115 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 27 Network Setting > Wireless > Others (continued) LABEL 802.11 Mode DESCRIPTION Select 802.11b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. Select 802.11n Only to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. Select 802.11b/g Mixed to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced. Select 802.11b/g/n Mixed to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g or IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced. 802.11 Protection Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed-mode networks (networks with both IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g traffic). Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS/CTS handshake. This helps improve IEEE 802.11g performance. Select Off to disable 802.11 protection. The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced in a mixed-mode network. This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b Only. Preamble Select a preamble type from the drop-down list box. Choices are Long or Short. See Section 7.10.7 on page 123 for more information. This field is configurable only when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 116 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless 7.9 The Channel Status Screen Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results. Click Network Setting > Wireless > Channel Status. The screen appears as shown. Click Scan to scan the wireless LAN channels. You can view the results in the Channel Scan Result section. Figure 43 Network Setting > Wireless > Channel Status 7.10 Technical Reference This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see Appendix D on page 327. 7.10.1 Wireless Network Overview Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges. A wireless client is a radio connected to a users computer. An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network. A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients, extending a networks range. Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 117 Chapter 7 Wireless An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points. An ad-hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information. The following figure provides an example of a wireless network. Figure 44 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your Device is the AP. Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines. Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentifier. If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel. Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information. Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP. Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Radio Channels In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a 118 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you create a network, you must select a channel to use. Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of available channels also varies. 7.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the Devices Web Configurator. Table 28 Additional Wireless Terms TERM DESCRIPTION In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices are sometimes not RTS/CTS Threshold aware of each others presence. This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through. By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the Device. The lower the value, the more often the devices must get permission. If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the Device. A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the Device does, it cannot communicate with the Device. Preamble Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. Fragmentation Threshold A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy. 7.10.3 Wireless Security Overview By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried on it. These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a key phrase) can access the network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key. These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attackers software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess - for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 119 Chapter 7 Wireless Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, its not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place. A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point (which you know was made in 1971) you could use 70dodchal71vanpoi as your security key. The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network. 7.10.3.1 SSID Normally, the Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the Device does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess. This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network. 7.10.3.2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network, see the devices Users Guide or other documentation. You can use the MAC address filter to tell the Device which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct information. This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network. 7.10.3.3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this. For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users. Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized 1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses. 2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. 120 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network. 7.10.3.4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message. The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication. (See Section 7.10.3.3 on page 120 for information about this.) Table 29 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication Weakest NO AUTHENTICATION No Security RADIUS SERVER WPA Static WEP WPA-PSK Strongest WPA2-PSK WPA2 For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK. Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the Device and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network. Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly. When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your Device, you can also select an option (WPA compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA compatible option in the Device. Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key. 7.10.4 Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance, interference and absorption. Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 121 Chapter 7 Wireless coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when physical objects (such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal. 7.10.5 BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Figure 45 Basic Service set 7.10.6 MBSSID Traditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The Devices MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security modes to different SSIDs. Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP. 7.10.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously. 122 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs

(they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each others communications (but not communicate with each other). MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security. 7.10.7 Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet. Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short preamble. Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks. Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide more efficient communications. Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it, otherwise the Device uses long preamble. Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate. 7.10.8 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) The Device can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links with other APs. You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you want to link to. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made. At the time of writing, WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only. Refer to your other access points documentation for details. The following figure illustrates how WDS link works between APs. Notebook computer A is a wireless client connecting to access point AP 1. AP 1 has no wired Internet connection, but it can establish a WDS link with access point AP 2, which has a wired Internet connection. When AP 1 has a WDS link with AP 2, the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2. Figure 46 WDS Link Example A WDS AP 1 AP 2 7.10.9 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) Your Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 123 Chapter 7 Wireless WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each devices documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. 7.10.9.1 Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information. Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button. Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button. 1 2 3 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another. Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the devices Users Guide for how to do this - for the Device, see Section 7.6 on page 112). Press the button on one of the devices (it doesnt matter which). For the Device you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds. 4 Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name

(SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee. If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. 7.10.9.2 PIN Configuration Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface). Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method. When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client) into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network. Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router

(referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method. 124 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices. Access the WPS section of the APs configuration interface. See the devices Users Guide for how to do this. Look for the clients WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the clients configuration interface (see the devices Users Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the Device, see Section 7.5 on page 110). Enter the clients PIN in the APs configuration interface. If the client devices configuration interface has an area for entering another devices PIN, you can either enter the clients PIN in the AP, or enter the APs PIN in the client - it does not matter which. Start WPS on both devices within two minutes. 7 Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself. 8 On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful. If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 125 Chapter 7 Wireless The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method. Figure 47 Example WPS Process: PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WPS This devices WPS PIN: 123456 WPS Enter WPS PIN from other device:

WPS WPS START START WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL SSID WPA(2)-PSK COMMUNICATION 7.10.9.3 How WPS Works When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly. 126 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point. Figure 48 How WPS works ACTIVATE WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES ACTIVATE WPS ENROLLEE WPS HANDSHAKE SECURE TUNNEL SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION REGISTRAR The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary. The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device. Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients. By default, a WPS devices is unconfigured. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes configured. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults. 7.10.9.4 Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup. The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 127 Chapter 7 Wireless is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information. Figure 49 WPS: Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 1 SECURITY INFO REGISTRAR AP1 In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2. Figure 50 WPS: Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR AP1 EXISTING CONNECTION O F Y I N R I T U C E S CLIENT 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 2 128 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead. Figure 51 WPS: Example Network Step 3 Chapter 7 Wireless CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR CLIENT 2 EXISTING CONNECTION N T I O C E N N O C G T I N X I S E SECURITYINFO AP1 ENROLLEE AP2 7.10.9.5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware. WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP). When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other. For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way. WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS. WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK). VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 129 Chapter 7 Wireless When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network. You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access points configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients (usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP. 130 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 8 Home Networking 8.1 Overview A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many networking devices are connected. It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building. Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses. LAN DSL 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP settings of your Device (Section 8.2 on page 133). Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses (Section 8.3 on page 136). Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the Device (Section 8.4 on page 138). Use the Additional Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP (Section 8.5 on page 139). Use the STB Vendor ID screen to have the Device automatically create static DHCP entries for Set Top Box (STB) devices when they request IP addresses (Section 8.8 on page 148) Use the 5th Ethernet Port screen to configure the Ethernet WAN port as a LAN port (Section 8.9 on page 148). Use the LAN VLAN screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of traffic sent out through individual LAN ports (Section 8.10 on page 149). VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 131 Chapter 8 Home Networking 8.1.2 What You Need To Know 8.1.2.1 About LAN IP Address IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Subnet Mask Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. DHCP A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server can assign your Device an IP address, subnet mask, DNS and other routing information when it's turned on. DNS DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a networking device before you can access it. RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon) When an IPv6 host sends a Router Solicitation (RS) request to discover the available routers, RADVD with Router Advertisement (RA) messages in response to the request. It specifies the minimum and maximum intervals of RA broadcasts. RA messages containing the address prefix. IPv6 hosts can be generated with the IPv6 prefix an IPv6 address. 8.1.2.2 About UPnP Identifying UPnP Devices UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:

Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses 132 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the Chapter 11 on page 177 for more information on NAT. Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the Device allows multicast messages on the LAN only. All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0. See Section 8.5 on page 139 for examples of installing and using UPnP. Finding Out More See Section 8.11 on page 150 for technical background information on LANs. 8.1.3 Before You Begin Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen. 8.2 The LAN Setup Screen Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your Device. Click Network Setting > Home Networking to open the LAN Setup screen. Follow these steps to configure your LAN settings. 1 2 Enter an IP address into the IP Address field. The IP address must be in dotted decimal notation. This will become the IP address of your Device. Enter the IP subnet mask into the IP Subnet Mask field. Unless instructed otherwise it is best to leave this alone, the configurator will automatically compute a subnet mask based upon the IP address you entered. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 133 Chapter 8 Home Networking 3 Click Apply to save your settings. Figure 52 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 30 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup LABEL Interface Group DESCRIPTION Group Name LAN IP Setup IP Address Subnet Mask IGMP Snooping Status Select the interface group name for which you want to configure LAN settings. See Chapter 13 on page 197 for how to create a new interface group. Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your Device in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default). Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example 255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your Device automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP Address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so. Select the Enable IGMP Snooping checkbox to allows the Device to passively learn multicast group. IGMP Mode Select Standard Mode to have the Device forward multicast packets to a port that joins the multicast group and broadcast unknown multicast packets from the WAN to all LAN ports. Select Blocking Mode to have the Device block all unknown multicast packets from the WAN. DHCP Server State DHCP Select Enable to have the Device act as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent. Select Disable to stop the DHCP server on the Device. Select DHCP Relay to have the Device forward DHCP request to the DHCP server. 134 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 30 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued) LABEL DHCP Relay Server Address DESCRIPTION This field is only available when you select DHCP Relay in the DHCP field. IP Address Enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in this field. IP Addressing Values Beginning IP Address Ending IP Address DHCP Server Lease Time This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field. This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. This field specifies the last of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. This is the period of time DHCP-assigned addresses is used. DHCP automatically assigns IP addresses to clients when they log in. DHCP centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the DHCP server program. DHCP leases addresses, for a period of time, which means that past addresses are recycled and made available for future reassignment to other systems. This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field. Days/Hours/

Minutes Enter the lease time of the DHCP server. DNS Values This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field. DNS Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service provider. Select Dynamic if you have the Dynamic DNS service. Select Static if you have the Static DNS service. DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 Enter the first and second DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address the Device passes to the DHCP clients. LAN IPv6 Mode Setup IPv6 State Select Enable to activate the IPv6 mode and configure IPv6 settings on the Device. LAN IPv6 Address Setup Delegate prefix from WAN Select this option to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the service provider or an uplink router. Static Select this option to configure a fixed IPv6 address for the Devices LAN IPv6 address. ULA IPv6 Address Setup IPv6 Address Prefix Length If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 address prefix that the Device uses for the LAN IPv6 address. If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 prefix length that the Device uses to generate the LAN IPv6 address. MLD Snooping An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (starting from the left) in the address compose the network address. This field displays the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network. Select Enable MLD Snooping to activate MLD Snooping on the Device. This allows the Device to check MLD packets passing through it and learn the multicast group membership. It helps reduce multicast traffic. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 135 Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 30 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued) LABEL LAN IPv6 Address Assign Setup DESCRIPTION Select how you want to obtain an IPv6 address:

stateless + DNS send by RADVD: The Device uses IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration. RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon) is enabled to have the Device send IPv6 prefix information in router advertisements periodically and in response to router solicitations. DHCPv6 server is disabled. (See page 132 for more information on RADVD.) stateless + DNS send by DHCPv6: The Device uses IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration. The DNS is provided by a DHCPv6 server. stateful + DHCPv6 server: The Device uses IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration. The DHCPv6 server is enabled to have the Device act as a DHCPv6 server and pass IPv6 addresses, DNS server and domain name information to DHCPv6 clients. stateful + DHCPv6 relay: The Device uses IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration. DHCPv6 Relay is enabled to have the Device relay client DHCPv6 requests. DHCPv6 Configuration DHCPv6 State This shows the status of the DHCPv6. IPv6 DNS Values IPv6 DNS Server 1-3 Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns IPv6 DNS server information. Select User-Defined if you have the IPv6 address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server IPv6 addresses the Device passes to the DHCP clients. Select None if you do not want to configure IPv6 DNS servers. IPv6 Address Values IPv6 Start Address IPv6 End Address IPv6 Domain Name If DHCPv6 is enabled, specify the first IPv6 address in the pool of addresses that can be assigned to DHCPv6 clients. If DHCPv6 is enabled, specify the last IPv6 address in the pool of addresses that can be assigned to DHCPv6 clients. If DHCPv6 is enabled, specify the domain name to be assigned to DHCPv6 clients. IPv6 Router Advertisement State RADVD State This shows the status of RADVD. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 8.3 The Static DHCP Screen This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. 136 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Use this screen to change your Devices static DHCP settings. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP to open the following screen. Figure 53 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP Chapter 8 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP LABEL Add new static lease DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new static DHCP entry.

Status MAC Address This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the client is connected to the Device. The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation). A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address. IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. Modify Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it. Click the Delete icon to delete a static DHCP entry. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected entry. If you click Add new static lease in the Static DHCP screen or the Edit icon next to a static DHCP entry, the following screen displays. Figure 54 Static DHCP: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 32 Static DHCP: Add/Edit DESCRIPTION LABEL Select this to activate the connection between the client and the Device. Active Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure static DHCP settings. See Chapter 13 on page 197 for how to create a new interface group. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 137 Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 32 Static DHCP: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Select Device Info DESCRIPTION If you select Manual Input, you can manually type in the MAC address and IP address of a computer on your LAN. You can also choose the name of a computer from the drop list and have the MAC Address and IP Address auto-detected. MAC Address If you select Manual Input, enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN. IP Address Apply Cancel If you select Manual Input, enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 8.4 The UPnP Screen Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. See page 132 for more information on UPnP. Use the following screen to configure the UPnP settings on your Device. Click Network Setting >

Home Networking > UPnP to display the screen shown next. Figure 55 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 33 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP LABEL UPnP DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the Device's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator). UPnP NAT-T Select Enable to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the Device so that they can communicate through the Device by using NAT traversal. UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application. 138 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 33 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP (continued) LABEL Apply DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes. Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 8.5 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP. Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me. 1 2 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box. Click Details. Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 139 Chapter 8 Home Networking 3 In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box. Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components 4 5 1 Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click Next. Restart the computer when prompted. Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP. Click Start and Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. 3 In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components . Network Connections 140 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays. Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details. Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Chapter 8 Home Networking 5 In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box. Networking Services 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next. 8.6 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the Device. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 141 Chapter 8 Home Networking Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the Device. Turn on your computer and the Device. Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway. Right-click the icon and select Properties. Network Connections In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created. Internet Connection Properties 1 2 3 142 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings. Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings Chapter 8 Home Networking Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add 5 When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically. 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray. System Tray Icon VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 143 Chapter 8 Home Networking 7 Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status. Internet Connection Status Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the Device without finding out the IP address of the Device first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the Device. Follow the steps below to access the web configurator. 1 Click Start and then Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. 144 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places. Network Connections Chapter 8 Home Networking 4 5 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network. Right-click on the icon for your Device and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen displays. Network Connections: My Network Places VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 145 Chapter 8 Home Networking 6 Right-click on the icon for your Device and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the Device. Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example 146 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 8.7 The Additional Subnet Screen Chapter 8 Home Networking Use the Additional Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP. IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The Device supports multiple logical LAN interfaces via its physical Ethernet interface with the Device itself as the gateway for the LAN network. When you use IP alias, you can also configure firewall rules to control access to the LAN's logical network (subnet). If your ISP provides the Public LAN service, the Device may use an LAN IP address that can be accessed from the WAN. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet to display the screen shown next. Figure 56 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 34 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet LABEL IP Alias Setup DESCRIPTION Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure the IP alias settings. See Chapter 13 on page 197 for how to create a new interface group. Active Select the checkbox to configure a LAN network for the Device. IP Address Enter the IP address of your Device in dotted decimal notation. IP Subnet Mask Your Device will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the Device. Public LAN Active Select the checkbox to enable the Public LAN feature. Your ISP must support Public LAN and Static IP. IP Address Enter the public IP address provided by your ISP. IP Subnet Mask Enter the public IP subnet mask provided by your ISP. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 147 Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 34 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet (continued) LABEL Offer Public IP by DHCP DESCRIPTION Select the checkbox to enable the Device to provide public IP addresses by DHCP server. Enable ARP Proxy Apply Cancel Select the checkbox to enable the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) proxy. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 8.8 The STB Vendor ID Screen Set Top Box (STB) devices with dynamic IP addresses sometimes dont renew their IP addresses before the lease time expires. This could lead to IP address conflicts if the STB continues to use an IP address that gets assigned to another device. Use this screen to list the Vendor IDs of connected STBs to have the Device automatically create static DHCP entries for them when they request IP addresses. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID to open this screen. Figure 57 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 35 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID LABEL Vendor ID 1 ~

5 DESCRIPTION Enter the STBs vendor ID. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 8.9 The 5th Ethernet Port Screen If you are using DSL connection, you can configure your Ethernet WAN port as an extra LAN port. This fifth Ethernet port is a Gigabit port. Click Network Settings > Home Networking > 5th Ethernet Port to open this screen. 148 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Figure 58 Network Settings > Home Networking > 5th Ethernet Port Chapter 8 Home Networking The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 36 Network Settings > Home Networking > 5th Ethernet Port LABEL State DESCRIPTION Select Enable to use the Ethernet WAN port as a LAN port on the Device. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 8.10 The LAN VLAN Screen Click Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN VLAN to open this screen. Use this screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of traffic sent out through individual LAN ports. Figure 59 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 37 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN VLAN LABEL Lan Port DESCRIPTION These represent the Devices LAN ports. Tag Operation Select what you want the Device to do to the IEEE 802.1q VLAN ID and priority tags of downstream traffic before sending it out through this LAN port. Unchange - Dont do anything to the traffics VLAN ID and priority tags. Add - Add VLAN ID and priority tags to untagged traffic. Remove - Delete one tag from tagged traffic. If the frame has double tags, this removes the outer tag. This does not affect untagged traffic. Remark - Change the value of the outer VLAN ID and priority tags. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 149 Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 37 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN VLAN (continued) LABEL 802.1P Mark DESCRIPTION Use this option to set what to do for the IEEE 802.1p priority tags when you add or remark the tags for a LAN ports downstream traffic. Either select Unchange to not modify the traffics priority tags or select an priority from 0 to 7 to use. The larger the number, the higher the priority. VLAN ID Apply Cancel If you will add or remark tags for this LAN ports downstream traffic, specify the VLAN ID

(from 0 to 4094) to use here. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 8.11 Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 8.11.1 LANs, WANs and the Device The actual physical connection determines whether the Device ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next. Figure 60 LAN and WAN IP Addresses LAN WAN 8.11.2 DHCP Setup DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the Device as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the Device provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. 150 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking IP Pool Setup The Device is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers. 8.11.3 DNS Server Addresses DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask. There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses. The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen. Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The Device supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature. Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the DHCP Setup screen. 8.11.4 LAN TCP/IP The Device has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number. Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the Device. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 151 Chapter 8 Home Networking Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your Device, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:

10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;

always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. 152 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 9 Routing 9.1 Overview The Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the Device send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes. For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the Devices LAN interface. The Device routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the Devices default gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN. Figure 61 Example of Routing Topology A R3 LAN WAN R1 R2 9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Static Route screen to view and set up static routes on the Device (Section 9.2 on page 154). Use the Policy Forwarding screen to configure policy routing on the Device. (Section 9.3 on page 155). Use the RIP screen to set up RIP settings on the Device. (Section 9.4 on page 157). VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 153 Chapter 9 Routing 9.2 The Routing Screen Use this screen to view and configure the static route rules on the Device. Click Network Setting

> Routing > Static Route to open the following screen. Figure 62 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 38 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route LABEL Add new static route DESCRIPTION Click this to configure a new static route.

Status Name This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the static route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this route is not active. This is the name that describes or identifies this route. Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. Subnet Mask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination. Gateway Interface Modify This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. This is the WAN interface used for this static route. Click the Edit icon to edit the static route on the Device. Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the Device. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route. 154 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route Use this screen to add or edit a static route. Click Add new static route in the Routing screen or the Edit icon next to the static route you want to edit. The screen shown next appears. Figure 63 Routing: Add/Edit Chapter 9 Routing The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 39 Routing: Add/Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route. Select this to enable the static route. Clear this to disable this static route without having to delete the entry. Route Name Enter a descriptive name for the static route. IP Type Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6. Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 network address of the final destination. If you are using IPv4 and need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. Enter the IP subnet mask here. Use Gateway IP Address The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. If you want to use the gateway IP address, select Enable. Gateway IP Address Enter the IP address of the gateway. Use Interface Select the WAN interface you want to use for this static route. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 9.3 The Policy Forwarding Screen Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the Device takes the shortest path to forward a packet. Policy forwarding allows the Device to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator. Policy-based routing is applied to outgoing packets, prior to the normal routing. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 155 Chapter 9 Routing You can use source-based policy forwarding to direct traffic from different users through different connections or distribute traffic among multiple paths for load sharing. The Policy Forwarding screen let you view and configure routing policies on the Device. Click Network Setting > Routing > Policy Forwarding to open the following screen. Figure 64 Network Setting > Routing > Policy Forwarding The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 40 Network Setting > Routing >Policy Forwarding LABEL Add new Policy Forward Rule DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new policy forwarding rule.

This is the index number of the entry. Policy Name This is the name of the rule. Source IP This is the source IP address. Source Subnet Mask his is the source subnet mask address. Protocol This is the transport layer protocol. Source Port This is the source port number. WAN Modify This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed. Click the Edit icon to edit this policy. Click the Delete icon to remove a policy from the Device. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the policy. 156 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 9.3.1 Add/Edit Policy Forwarding Click Add new Policy Forward Rule in the Policy Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next to a policy. Use this screen to configure the required information for a policy route. Figure 65 Policy Forwarding: Add/Edit Chapter 9 Routing The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 41 Policy Forwarding: Add/Edit LABEL Policy Name DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name of up to 8 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces. Source IP Enter the source IP address. Source Subnet Mask Enter the source subnet mask address. Protocol Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP). Source Port Enter the source port number. Source MAC Enter the source MAC address. WAN Apply Cancel Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have the WAN interface(s) already configured in the Broadband screens. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 9.4 The RIP Screen Routing Information Protocol (RIP, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) allows a device to exchange routing information with other routers. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 157 Chapter 9 Routing Click Network Setting > Routing > RIP to open the RIP screen. Figure 66 RIP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 42 RIP LABEL Interface Version DESCRIPTION This is the name of the interface in which the RIP setting is used. The RIP version controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Device sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP version 1 is universally supported but RIP version 2 carries more information. RIP version 1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology. Operation Select Passive to have the Device update the routing table based on the RIP packets received from neighbors but not advertise its route information to other routers in this interface. Select Active to have the Device advertise its route information and also listen for routing updates from neighboring routers. Enabled Apply Cancel Select the check box to activate the settings. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 158 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.1 Overview Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a networks ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-

demand. Configure QoS on the Device to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network performance. Setting up QoS involves these steps:

1 2 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows. Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow. The Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video. This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers. 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The General screen lets you enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth (Section 10.3 on page 161). The Queue Setup screen lets you configure QoS queue assignment (Section 10.4 on page 162). The Class Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS classifiers (Section 10.5 on page 164). The Policer Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS policers (Section 10.5 on page 164). The Monitor screen lets you view the Device's QoS-related packet statistics (Section 10.7 on page 171). VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 159 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. QoS versus Cos QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types. CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated Services or DS). IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. Tagging and Marking In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value, IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker. Traffic Shaping Bursty traffic may cause network congestion. Traffic shaping regulates packets to be transmitted with a pre-configured data transmission rate using buffers (or queues). Your Device uses the Token Bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large bursts while keeping a limit at the average rate. Traffic Rate Traffic Rate c i f f a r T c i f f a r T Time Time

(Before Traffic Shaping)

(After Traffic Shaping) 160 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Traffic Policing Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user-defined criteria. Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user-defined criteria and identify it as either conforming, exceeding or violating the criteria. Traffic Rate Traffic Rate c i f f a r T c i f f a r T Time Time

(Before Traffic Policing)

(After Traffic Policing) The Device supports three incoming traffic metering algorithms: Token Bucket Filter (TBF), Single Rate Two Color Maker (srTCM), and Two Rate Two Color Marker (trTCM). You can specify actions which are performed on the colored packets. See Section 10.8 on page 172 for more information on each metering algorithm. 10.3 The Quality of Service General Screen Click Network Setting > QoS > General to open the screen as shown next. Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth. See Section 10.1 on page 159 for more information. Figure 67 Network Settings > QoS > General VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 161 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 43 Network Setting > QoS > General LABEL QoS DESCRIPTION Select the Enable check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance. WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth LAN Managed Downstream Bandwidth Upstream traffic priority Assigned by Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interfaces that you want to allocate using QoS. The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interfaces actual transmission speed. For example, set the WAN interfaces speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps. You can set this number higher than the interfaces actual transmission speed. The Device uses up to 95% of the DSL ports actual upstream transmission speed even if you set this number higher than the DSL ports actual transmission speed. You can also set this number lower than the interfaces actual transmission speed. This will cause the Device to not use some of the interfaces available bandwidth. If you leave this field blank, the Device automatically sets this number to be 95% of the WAN interfaces actual upstream transmission speed. Enter the amount of downstream bandwidth for the LAN interfaces (including WLAN) that you want to allocate using QoS. The recommendation is to set this speed to match the WAN interfaces actual transmission speed. For example, set the LAN managed downstream bandwidth to 100000 kbps if you use a 100 Mbps wired Ethernet WAN connection. You can also set this number lower than the WAN interfaces actual transmission speed. This will cause the Device to not use some of the interfaces available bandwidth. If you leave this field blank, the Device automatically sets this to the LAN interfaces maximum supported connection speed. Select how the Device assigns priorities to various upstream traffic flows. None: Disables auto priority mapping and has the Device put packets into the queues according to your classification rules. Traffic which does not match any of the classification rules is mapped into the default queue with the lowest priority. Ethernet Priority: Automatically assign priority based on the IEEE 802.1p priority level. IP Precedence: Automatically assign priority based on the first three bits of the TOS field in the IP header. Packet Length: Automatically assign priority based on the packet size. Smaller packets get higher priority since control, signaling, VoIP, internet gaming, or other real-time packets are usually small while larger packets are usually best effort data packets like file transfers. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 10.4 The Queue Setup Screen Click Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next. 162 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment. Figure 68 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 44 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup LABEL Add new Queue Click this button to create a new queue entry. DESCRIPTION

Status Name Interface Priority Weight Buffer Management This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the queue is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this queue is active. A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active. This shows the descriptive name of this queue. This shows the name of the Devices interface through which traffic in this queue passes. This shows the priority of this queue. This shows the weight of this queue. This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue. Queue management algorithms determine how the Device should handle packets when it receives too many (network congestion). Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the queue. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 163 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue Click Add new Queue or the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue. Figure 69 Queue Setup: Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 45 Queue Setup: Add LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Select to enable or disable this queue. Name Interface Enter the descriptive name of this queue. Select the interface to which this queue is applied. This field is read-only if you are editing the queue. Priority Select the priority level (from 1 to 7) of this queue. The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested. Weight Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue. If two queues have the same priority level, the Device divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights. Buffer Management This field displays Drop Tail (DT). Drop Tail (DT) is a simple queue management algorithm that allows the Device buffer to accept as many packets as it can until it is full. Once the buffer is full, new packets that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer again (packets are transmitted out of it). Rate Limit Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on this queue. OK Cancel Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 10.5 The Class Setup Screen Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow. 164 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) You can give different priorities to traffic that the Device forwards out through the WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications. Click Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup to open the following screen. Figure 70 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 46 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup LABEL Add new Classifier DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new classifier.

Status Class Name Classification Criteria DSCP Mark 802.1P Mark VLAN ID Tag To Queue Modify This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the classifier is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this classifier is active. A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active. This is the name of the classifier. This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the interface from which traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this classifier. This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier. This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier. This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier. This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put. Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 165 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class Click Add new Classifier in the Class Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a classifier to open the following screen. Figure 71 Class Setup: Add/Edit 166 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 47 Class Setup: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Select this to enable this classifier. Active Class Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces. Classification Order Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to the number you selected after clicking Apply. Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list. From Interface If you want to classify the traffic by an ingress interface, select an interface from the From Interface drop-down list box. Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic. If you select IP, you also need to configure source or destination MAC address, IP address, DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type. If you select 802.1Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level. Source Address Subnet Netmask Port Range Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. Enter the source subnet mask. If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. MAC Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet. MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Destination Address Subnet Netmask Port Range Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. Enter the source subnet mask. If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. MAC Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet. MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Others VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 167 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 47 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Service DESCRIPTION This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. This field simplifies classifier configuration by allowing you to select a predefined application. When you select a predefined application, you do not configure the rest of the filter fields. IP Protocol This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP, UDP, ICMP or IGMP. If you select User defined, enter the protocol (service type) number. DHCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select a DHCP option. If you select Vendor Class ID (DHCP Option 60), enter the Vendor Class Identifier

(Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware. If you select User Class ID (DHCP Option 77), enter a string that identifies the users category or application type in the matched DHCP packets. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 46 to 1500) in the fields provided. Packet Length DSCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided. 802.1P This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop-down list box.

"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest. VLAN ID This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field. Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number. TCP ACK This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK (Acknowledge) flag. Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. DSCP Mark This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. If you select Mark, enter a DSCP value with which the Device replaces the DSCP field in the packets. If you select Unchange, the Device keep the DSCP field in the packets. 802.1P Mark Select a priority level with which the Device replaces the IEEE 802.1p priority field in the packets. If you select Unchange, the Device keep the 802.1p priority field in the packets. VLAN ID If you select Remark, enter a VLAN ID number with which the Device replaces the VLAN ID of the frames. If you select Remove, the Device deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them out. If you select Add, the Device treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID. If you select Unchange, the Device keep the VLAN ID in the packets. Forward to Interface Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out. If you select Unchange, the Device forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table. 168 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 47 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL To Queue Index Select a queue that applies to this class. DESCRIPTION You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 10.6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen Use this screen to configure QoS policers that allow you to limit the transmission rate of incoming traffic. Click Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup. The screen appears as shown. Figure 72 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 48 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup LABEL Add new Policer Click this to create a new entry. DESCRIPTION

Status Name Regulated Classes Meter Type Rule Action Modify This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the policer is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this policer is active. A gray bulb signifies that this policer is not active. This field displays the descriptive name of this policer. This field displays the name of a QoS classifier This field displays the type of QoS metering algorithm used in this policer. These are the rates and burst sizes against which the policer checks the traffic of the member QoS classes. This shows the how the policer has the Device treat different types of traffic belonging to the policers member QoS classes. Click the Edit icon to edit the policer. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing policer. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 169 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer Click Add new Policer in the Policer Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a policer to show the following screen. Figure 73 Policer Setup: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 49 Policer Setup: Add/Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Select the check box to activate this policer. Name Enter the descriptive name of this policer. Meter Type This shows the traffic metering algorithm used in this policer. The Simple Token Bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. Each token represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size. The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR), the Committed Burst Size (CBS) and the Excess Burst Size (EBS). The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR). Specify the committed rate. When the incoming traffic rate of the member QoS classes is less than the committed rate, the device applies the conforming action to the traffic. Specify the committed burst size for packet bursts. This must be equal to or less than the peak burst size (two rate three color) or excess burst size (single rate three color) if it is also configured. This is the maximum size of the (first) token bucket in a traffic metering algorithm. Committed Rate Committed Burst Size Conforming Action Specify what the Device does for packets within the committed rate and burst size (green-

marked packets). Non-

Conforming Action Pass: Send the packets without modification. DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to use. Specify what the Device does for packets that exceed the excess burst size or peak rate and burst size (red-marked packets). Drop: Discard the packets. DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to use. The packets may be dropped if there is congestion on the network. 170 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 49 Policer Setup: Add/Edit LABEL Available Class DESCRIPTION Select a QoS classifier to apply this QoS policer to traffic that matches the QoS classifier. Selected Class Highlight a QoS classifier in the Available Class box and use the > button to move it to the Selected Class box. To remove a QoS classifier from the Selected Class box, select it and use the < button. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 10.7 The QoS Monitor Screen To view the Devices QoS packet statistics, click Network Setting > QoS > Monitor. The screen appears as shown. Figure 74 Network Setting > QoS > Monitor The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 50 Network Setting > QoS > Monitor LABEL Refresh Interval DESCRIPTION Enter how often you want the Device to update this screen. Select No Refresh to stop refreshing statistics. Interface Monitor

Name Pass Rate This is the index number of the entry. This shows the name of the interface on the Device. This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are transmitted successfully. Drop Rate This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are dropped. Queue Monitor

Name Pass Rate This is the index number of the entry. This shows the name of the queue. This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are transmitted successfully. Drop Rate This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are dropped. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 171 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.8 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the Device features described in this chapter. IEEE 802.1Q Tag The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network. IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates the 802.1p). Table 51 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL Level 7 TRAFFIC TYPE Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages. Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay). Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter. Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems Network Architecture) transactions. Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay. This is for spare bandwidth. This is typically used for non-critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users. Level 0 Typically used for best-effort traffic. DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet types. DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going. DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services (DS) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field. 172 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits) The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies. IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. There are eight classes of services (ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest. Automatic Priority Queue Assignment If you enable QoS on the Device, the Device can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class. The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the Device. On the Device, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested. Table 52 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping PRIORITY QUEUE 0 1 2 3 4 5 LAYER 2 IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY

(ETHERNET PRIORITY) 1 2 0 3 4 5 LAYER 3 TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET LENGTH (BYTE) 0 0 1 2 3 000000 000000 001110 001100 001010 001000 010110 010100 010010 010000 011110 011100 011010 011000

>1100 250~1100

<250 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 173 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 52 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping PRIORITY QUEUE 6 7 LAYER 2 IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY

(ETHERNET PRIORITY) 6 7 Token Bucket LAYER 3 TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET LENGTH (BYTE) 4 5 6 7 100110 100100 100010 100000 101110 101000 110000 111000 The token bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. The bucket stores tokens, each of which represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size, so the bucket can hold up to b tokens. Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate. The following shows how tokens work with packets:

A packet can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the bucket. If there are no tokens in the bucket, the Device stops transmitting until enough tokens are generated. If not enough tokens are available, the Device treats the packet in either one of the following ways:

In traffic shaping:

Holds it in the queue until enough tokens are available in the bucket. In traffic policing:

Drops it. Transmits it but adds a DSCP mark. The Device may drop these marked packets if the network is overloaded. Configure the bucket size to be equal to or less than the amount of the bandwidth that the interface can support. It does not help if you set it to a bucket size over the interfaces capability. The smaller the bucket size, the lower the data transmission rate and that may cause outgoing packets to be dropped. A larger transmission rate requires a big bucket size. For example, use a bucket size of 10 kbytes to get the transmission rate up to 10 Mbps. Single Rate Three Color Marker The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM, defined in RFC 2697) is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to one user-defined rate, the Committed Information Rate

(CIR), and two burst sizes: the Committed Burst Size (CBS) and Excess Burst Size (EBS). 174 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) The srTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green. The srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (CBS and EBS). Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate, called Committed Information Rate

(CIR). When the first bucket (CBS) is full, new tokens overflow into the second bucket (EBS). All packets are evaluated against the CBS. If a packet does not exceed the CBS it is marked green. Otherwise it is evaluated against the EBS. If it is below the EBS then it is marked yellow. If it exceeds the EBS then it is marked red. The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in srTCM:

A packet arrives. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the CBS bucket. If there are not enough tokens in the CBS bucket, the Device checks the EBS bucket. The packet is marked yellow if there are sufficient tokens in the EBS bucket. Otherwise, the packet is marked red. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped. Two Rate Three Color Marker The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM, defined in RFC 2698) is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user-defined rates: the Committed Information Rate

(CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR). The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network. The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR. CIR and PIR values are based on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client. The trTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green. The trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (Committed Burst Size

(CBS) and Peak Burst Size (PBS)). Tokens are generated and added into the two buckets at the CIR and PIR respectively. All packets are evaluated against the PIR. If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red. Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR. If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow. Finally, if it is below the CIR then it is marked green. The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in trTCM:

A packet arrives. If the number of tokens in the PBS bucket is less than the size of the packet (in bytes), the packet is marked red and may be dropped regardless of the CBS bucket. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped. If the PBS bucket has enough tokens, the Device checks the CBS bucket. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). Otherwise, the packet is marked yellow. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 175 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 176 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Device. NAT (Network Address Translation -

NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Port Forwarding screen to configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network (Section 11.2 on page 178). Use the Applications screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network (Section 11.3 on page 181). Use the Port Triggering screen to add and configure the Devices trigger port settings (Section 11.4 on page 182). Use the DMZ screen to configure a default server (Section 11.5 on page 185). Use the ALG screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP (VoIP) ALG in the Device (Section 11.6 on page 186). Use the Address Mapping screen to configure the Device's address mapping settings (Section 11.7 on page 186). 11.1.2 What You Need To Know Inside/Outside Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/Local Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. NAT In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber

(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 177 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world. Finding Out More See Section 11.8 on page 188 for advanced technical information on NAT. 11.2 The Port Forwarding Screen Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports. The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix F on page 349. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example) Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a 178 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 75 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A=192.168.1.33 LAN B=192.168.1.34 WAN 192.168.1.1 IP Address assigned by ISP C=192.168.1.3 D=192.168.1.36 Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen. See Appendix F on page 349 for port numbers commonly used for particular services. Figure 76 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 53 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding LABEL Add new rule DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new rule.

Status This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the NAT rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. Service Name This shows the services name. WAN Interface This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. WAN IP Server IP Address Start Port End Port Translation Start Port Translation End Port This field displays the incoming packets destination IP address. This is the servers IP address. This is the first external port number that identifies a service. This is the last external port number that identifies a service. This is the first internal port number that identifies a service. This is the last internal port number that identifies a service. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 179 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 53 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding (continued) LABEL Protocol DESCRIPTION This shows the IP protocol supported by this virtual server, whether it is TCP, UDP, or TCP/

UDP. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. 11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding Click Add new rule in the Port Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to open the following screen. Figure 77 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 54 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Clear the checkbox to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it. Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on). WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled. WAN IP Enter the WAN IP address for which the incoming service is destined. If the packets destination IP address doesnt match the one specified here, the port forwarding rule will not be applied. Start Port Enter the original destination port for the packets. To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the End Port field. To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in the End Port field. 180 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide

Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 54 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL End Port DESCRIPTION Enter the last port of the original destination port range. To forward only one port, enter the port number in the Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field. To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port field above. Translation Start Port This shows the port number to which you want the Device to translate the incoming port. For a range of ports, enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated. Translation End Port Server IP Address Protocol OK Cancel This shows the last port of the translated port range. Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here. Select the protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 11.3 The Applications Screen This screen provides a summary of all NAT applications and their configuration. In addition, this screen allows you to create new applications and/or remove existing ones. To access this screen, click Network Setting > NAT > Applications. The following screen appears. Figure 78 Network Setting > NAT > Applications The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 55 Network Setting > NAT > Applications LABEL Add new application DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new NAT application rule. Application Forwarded This field shows the type of application that the service forwards. WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. Server IP Address Modify This field displays the destination IP address for the service. Click the Delete icon to delete the rule. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 181 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.3.1 Add New Application This screen lets you create new NAT application rules. Click Add new application in the Applications screen to open the following screen. Figure 79 Applications: Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 56 Applications: Add LABEL WAN Interface DESCRIPTION Select the WAN interface that you want to apply this NAT rule to. Server IP Address Application Category Application Forwarded View Rule OK Cancel Enter the inside IP address of the application here. Select the category of the application from the drop-down list box. Select a service from the drop-down list box and the Device automatically configures the protocol, start, end, and map port number that define the service. Click this to display the configuration of the service that you have chosen in Application Fowarded. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 11.4 The Port Triggering Screen Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service

(coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN). The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address. Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service. The Device records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the Device's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("open" port), the Device forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that computers connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application. 182 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) For example:

Figure 80 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example 1 2 3 4 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070). Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the Device to record Janes computer IP address. The Device associates Jane's computer IP address with the "open" port range of 6970-7170. The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170. The Device forwards the traffic to Janes computer IP address. 5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The Device times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol) or two hours with TCP/IP

(Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol). Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering to open the following screen. Use this screen to view your Devices trigger port settings. Figure 81 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 57 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering LABEL Add new rule DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new rule.

Status This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the port triggering rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. Service Name This field displays the name of the service used by this rule. WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. Trigger Start Port The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the Device to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN. This is the first port number that identifies a service. This is the last port number that identifies a service. Trigger End Port Trigger Proto. This is the trigger transport layer protocol. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 183 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 57 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering (continued) LABEL Open Start Port The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. DESCRIPTION This is the first port number that identifies a service. Open End Port This is the last port number that identifies a service. Open Proto. This is the open transport layer protocol. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. 11.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule This screen lets you create new port triggering rules. Click Add new rule in the Port Triggering screen or click a rules Edit icon to open the following screen. Figure 82 Port Triggering: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 58 Port Triggering: Configuration Add/Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Select the check box to enable this rule. Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on). WAN Interface Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port triggering rules. Trigger Start Port The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the Device to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN. Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Trigger End Port Trigger Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. 184 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 58 Port Triggering: Configuration Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Open Start Port The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. DESCRIPTION Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. Open End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Open Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. OK Cancel Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 11.5 The DMZ Screen In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup screen. Figure 83 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 59 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ LABEL Default Server Address DESCRIPTION Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen. Note: If you do not assign a Default Server Address, the Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 185 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.6 The ALG Screen Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). A SIP ALG allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream. When the Device registers with the SIP register server, the SIP ALG translates the Devices private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if your Device is behind a SIP ALG. Use this screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP (VoIP) ALG in the Device. To access this screen, click Network Setting > NAT > ALG. Figure 84 Network Setting > NAT > ALG The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 60 Network Setting > NAT > ALG LABEL NAT ALG DESCRIPTION Enable this to make sure applications such as FTP and file transfer in IM applications work correctly with port-forwarding and address-mapping rules. SIP ALG Apply Cancel Enable this to make sure SIP (VoIP) works correctly with port-forwarding and address-

mapping rules. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 11.7 The Address Mapping Screen Ordering your rules is important because the Device applies the rules in the order that you specify. When a rule matches the current packet, the Device takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored. Click Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping to display the following screen. Figure 85 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping 186 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 61 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping LABEL Add new rule DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new rule. Set This is the index number of the address mapping set. Local Start IP This is the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA). Local End IP This is the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address. This field is blank for One-to-One mapping types. Global Start IP This is the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the Many-to-One mapping type. Global End IP This is the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for One-to-One and Many-to-One mapping types. Type This is the address mapping type. One-to-One: This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type. Many-to-One: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), the Device's Single User Account feature that previous routers supported only. Many-to-Many: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing address mapping rule. Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action. 11.7.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule To add or edit an address mapping rule, click Add new rule or the rules edit icon in the Address Mapping screen to display the screen shown next. Figure 86 Address Mapping: Add/Edit VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 187 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 62 Address Mapping: Add/Edit LABEL Type DESCRIPTION Choose the IP/port mapping type from one of the following. One-to-One: This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type. Many-to-One: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), the Device's Single User Account feature that previous routers supported only. Many-to-Many: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. Local Start IP Enter the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA). Local End IP Enter the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address. This field is blank for One-to-One mapping types. Global Start IP Enter the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the Many-to-One mapping type. Global End IP Enter the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for One-to-One and Many-to-One mapping types. Set OK Select the number of the mapping set for which you want to configure. Click OK to save your changes. Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 11.8 Technical Reference This part contains more information regarding NAT. 11.8.1 NAT Definitions Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. 188 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information. Table 63 NAT Definitions ITEM Inside DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN. Outside This refers to the host on the WAN. Local Global This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN. NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host. 11.8.2 What NAT Does In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber

(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed. The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-

to-One and Many-to-Many Overload mapping), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your Device filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT). VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 189 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.8.3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The Device keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this. Figure 87 How NAT Works LAN 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.12 SA 192.168.1.10 WAN NAT Table Inside Local IP Address 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.13 Inside Global IP Address IGA 1 IGA 2 IGA 3 IGA 4 SA IGA1 Inside Local Address (ILA) Inside Global Address (IGA) 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.10 190 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.8.4 NAT Application The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs using IP alias) behind the Device can communicate with three distinct WAN networks. Figure 88 NAT Application With IP Alias Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Please also refer to the Supporting CD for more examples and details on port forwarding and NAT. Table 64 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES ECHO FTP (File Transfer Protocol) SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) DNS (Domain Name System) Finger HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web) POP3 (Post Office Protocol) NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) SNMP trap PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) PORT NUMBER 7 21 25 53 79 80 110 119 161 162 1723 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 191 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Port Forwarding Example Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 89 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A=192.168.1.33 192.168.1.1 B=192.168.1.34 C=192.168.1.35 D=192.168.1.36 IP address assigned by ISP 192 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 12 Dynamic DNS Setup 12.1 Overview DNS DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it. In addition to the system DNS server(s), each WAN interface (service) is set to have its own static or dynamic DNS server list. You can configure a DNS static route to forward DNS queries for certain domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server(s). The Device uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify in the Broadband screen) to resolve domain names that do not match any DNS routing entry. After the Device receives a DNS reply from a DNS server, it creates a new entry for the resolved IP address in the routing table. Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address. First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key. 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the DNS Entry screen to view, configure, or remove DNS routes (Section 12.2 on page 194). Use the Dynamic DNS screen to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the Device

(Section 12.3 on page 195). VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 193 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup 12.1.2 What You Need To Know DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname. If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS. 12.2 The DNS Entry Screen Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the Device. Click Network Setting > DNS to open the DNS Entry screen. Figure 90 Network Setting > DNS > DNS Entry The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 65 Network Setting > DNS > DNS Entry LABEL Add new DNS entry DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new DNS entry.

Hostname IP Address Modify This is the index number of the entry. This indicates the host name or domain name. This indicates the IP address assigned to this computer. Click the Edit icon to edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. 194 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup 12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry You can manually add or edit the Devices DNS name and IP address entry. Click Add new DNS entry in the DNS Entry screen or the Edit icon next to the entry you want to edit. The screen shown next appears. Figure 91 DNS Entry: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 66 DNS Entry: Add/Edit DESCRIPTION LABEL Enter the host name of the DNS entry. Host Name IP Address Enter the IP address of the DNS entry. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 12.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen Use this screen to change your Devices DDNS. Click Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS. The screen appears as shown. Figure 92 Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 195 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 67 Network Setting > DNS > > Dynamic DNS LABEL Dynamic DNS DESCRIPTION Select Enable to use dynamic DNS. Service Provider Select your Dynamic DNS service provider from the drop-down list box. Hostname Type the domain name assigned to your Device by your Dynamic DNS provider. You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (","). Username Password Email Key Apply Cancel Type your user name. Type the password assigned to you. If you select TZO in the Service Provider field, enter the user name you used to register for this service. If you select TZO in the Service Provider field, enter the password you used to register for this service. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 196 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 13 Interface Group 13.1 Overview By default, all LAN and WAN interfaces on the Device are in the same group and can communicate with each other. Create interface groups to have the Device assign the IP addresses in different domains to different groups. Each group acts as an independent network on the Device. This lets devices connected to an interface groups LAN interfaces communicate through the interface groups WAN or LAN interfaces but not other WAN or LAN interfaces. 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Interface Group screens let you create multiple networks on the Device (Section 13.2 on page 197). 13.2 The Interface Group Screen You can manually add a LAN interface to a new group. Alternatively, you can have the Device automatically add the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on which traffic is received to an interface group when its DHCP Vendor ID option information matches one listed for the interface group. Use the LAN screen to configure the private IP addresses the DHCP server on the Device assigns to the clients in the default and/or user-defined groups. If you set the Device to assign IP addresses based on the clients DHCP Vendor ID option information, you must enable DHCP server and configure LAN TCP/IP settings for both the default and user-defined groups. See Chapter 8 on page 131 for more information. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 197 Chapter 13 Interface Group In the following example, the client that sends packets with the DHCP Vendor ID option set to MSFT 5.0 (meaning it is a Windows 2000 DHCP client) is assigned the IP address 192.168.2.2 and uses the WAN VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1 interface. Figure 93 Interface Grouping Application Default: ETH 2~4 192.168.1.x/24 192.168.2.x/24 DHCP Vendor ID option: MSFT 5.0 eth10.0 VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1 Internet Click Network Setting > Interface Group to open the following screen. Figure 94 Network Setting > Interface Group The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 68 Network Setting > Interface Group LABEL Add New Interface Group DESCRIPTION Click this button to create a new interface group. Group Name This shows the descriptive name of the group. WAN Interface This shows the WAN interfaces in the group. LAN Interfaces This shows the LAN interfaces in the group. Criteria Modify Add This shows the filtering criteria for the group. Click the Delete icon to remove the group. Click this button to create a new group. 13.2.1 Interface Group Configuration Click the Add New Interface Group button in the Interface Group screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to create a new interface group. 198 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Note: An interface can belong to only one group at a time. Figure 95 Interface Group Configuration Chapter 13 Interface Group The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 69 Interface Group Configuration LABEL Group Name DESCRIPTION Enter a name to identify this group. You can enter up to 30 characters. You can use letters, numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed. Select the WAN interface this group uses. The group can have up to one PTM interface and up to one ATM interface. Select None to not add a WAN interface to this group. Select one or more LAN interfaces (Ethernet LAN, HPNA or wireless LAN) in the Available LAN Interfaces list and use the left arrow to move them to the Grouped LAN Interfaces list to add the interfaces to this group. To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the Grouped LAN Interfaces, use the right-facing arrow. Click Add to identify LAN hosts to add to the interface group by criteria such as the type of the hardware or firmware. See Section 13.2.2 on page 200 for more information. WAN Interface used in the grouping Grouped LAN Interfaces Available LAN Interfaces Automatically Add Clients With the following DHCP Vendor IDs

This shows the index number of the rule. Filter Criteria This shows the filtering criteria. The LAN interface on which the matched traffic is received will belong to this group automatically. WildCard Support This shows if wildcard on DHCP option 60 is enabled. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 199 Chapter 13 Interface Group Table 69 Interface Group Configuration (continued) LABEL Remove DESCRIPTION Click the Remove icon to delete this rule from the Device. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 13.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria Click the Add button in the Interface Grouping Configuration screen to open the following screen. Figure 96 Interface Grouping Criteria The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 70 Interface Grouping Criteria LABEL Source MAC Address DESCRIPTION Enter the source MAC address of the packet. DHCP Option 60 Select this option and enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware. Enable wildcard on DHCP option 60 option DHCP Option 61 IAID Select this option to be able to use wildcards in the Vendor Class Identifier configured for DHCP option 60. Select this and enter the device identity of the matched traffic. Enter the Identity Association Identifier (IAID) of the device, for example, the WAN connection index number. 200 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 13 Interface Group Table 70 Interface Grouping Criteria (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select DUID-LLT (DUID Based on Link-layer Address Plus Time) to enter the hardware type, a time value and the MAC address of the device. Select DUID-EN (DUID Assigned by Vendor Based upon Enterprise Number) to enter the vendors registered enterprise number. Select DUID-LL (DUID Based on Link-layer Address) to enter the devices hardware type and hardware address (MAC address) in the following fields. Select Other to enter any string that identifies the device in the DUID field. Select this and enter vendor specific information of the matched traffic. DUID type DHCP Option 125 Enterprise Number Enter the vendors 32-bit enterprise number registered with the IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority). Manufactur er OUI Specify the vendors OUI (Organization Unique Identifier). It is usually the first three bytes of the MAC address. Product Class Model Name Serial Number Enter the product class of the device. Enter the model name of the device. Enter the serial number of the device. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 201 Chapter 13 Interface Group 202 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 14 USB Service 14.1 Overview The Device has a USB port used to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive. In the USB Service screens, you can enable file-sharing server, media server, and printer server. 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the File Sharing screen to enable file-sharing server (Section 14.2 on page 204). Use the Media Server screen to enable or disable the sharing of media files (Section 14.3 on page 206). Use the Printer Server screen to enable the print server (Section 14.4 on page 207). 14.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. 14.1.2.1 About File Sharing Workgroup name This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources such as a printer or files. Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a network. Shares When settings are set to default, each USB device connected to the Device is given a folder, called a share. If a USB hard drive connected to the Device has more than one partition, then each partition will be allocated a share. You can also configure a share to be a sub-folder or file on the USB device. File Systems A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device. Often different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems. The file sharing feature on your Device supports File Allocation Table (FAT) and FAT32. Common Internet File System The Device uses Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol for its file sharing functions. CIFS compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the Device. CIFS VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 203 Chapter 14 USB Service protocol is supported on Microsoft Windows, Linux Samba and other operating systems (refer to your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility). 14.1.2.2 About Printer Server Print Server This is a computer or other device which manages one or more printers, and which sends print jobs to each printer from the computer itself or other devices. Operating System An operating system (OS) is the interface which helps you manage a computer. Common examples are Microsoft Windows, Mac OS or Linux. TCP/IP TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol) is a set of communications protocols that most of the Internet runs on. Port A port maps a network service such as http to a process running on your computer, such as a process run by your web browser. When traffic from the Internet is received on your computer, the port number is used to identify which process running on your computer it is intended for. Supported OSs Your operating system must support TCP/IP ports for printing and be compatible with the RAW (port 9100) protocol. The following OSs support Devices printer sharing feature. Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98 SE (Second Edition), Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP or Macintosh OS X. 14.2 The File Sharing Screen You can share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your Device with users on your network. 204 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide The following figure is an overview of the Devices file server feature. Computers A and B can access files on a USB device (C) which is connected to the Device. Chapter 14 USB Service Figure 97 File Sharing Overview B C A The Device will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup. In this case, contact your network administrator. 14.2.1 Before You Begin Make sure the Device is connected to your network and turned on. 1 2 Connect the USB device to one of the Devices USB port. Make sure the Device is connected to your network. The Device detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing. If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on. Note: If your USB device cannot be detected by the Device, see the troubleshooting for suggestions. Use this screen to set up file sharing using the Device. To access this screen, click Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing. Figure 98 Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 205 Chapter 14 USB Service Each field is described in the following table. Table 71 Network Setting > Home Networking > File Sharing LABEL File Sharing Services DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate file sharing through the Device. Host Name Enter the host name on the share. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 14.3 The Media Server Screen The media server feature lets anyone on your network play video, music, and photos from the USB storage device connected to your Device (without having to copy them to another computer). The Device can function as a DLNA-compliant media server. The Device streams files to DLNA-compliant media clients (like Windows Media Player). The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a group of personal computer and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home network. The Device media server enables you to:

Publish all shares for everyone to play media files in the USB storage device connected to the Device. Use hardware-based media clients like the DMA-2500 to play the files. Note: Anyone on your network can play the media files in the published shares. No user name and password or other form of security is used. The media server is enabled by default with the video, photo, and music shares published. To change your Devices media server settings, click Network Setting > USB Service > Media Server. The screen appears as shown. Figure 99 Network Setting > USB Service > Media Server 206 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 14 USB Service The following table describes the labels in this menu. Table 72 Network Setting > USB Service > Media Server LABEL Media Server DESCRIPTION Select Enable to have the Device function as a DLNA-compliant media server. Enable the media server to let (DLNA-compliant) media clients on your network play media files located in the shares. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 14.4 The Printer Server Screen The Device allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN. You can do this by connecting a USB printer to one of the USB ports on the Device and then adding the printer on the computers connected to your network. See Section 4.11 on page 62 for instructions on adding a printer on your computer. Figure 100 Sharing a USB Printer 14.4.1 Before You Begin To configure the print server you need the following:

Your Device must be connected to your computer and any other devices on your network. The USB printer must be connected to your Device. A USB printer with the driver already installed on your computer. See Section 4.11 on page 62 for instructions on adding a printer on your computer. Note: Your printers installation instructions may ask that you connect the printer to your computer. Connect your printer to the Device instead. Use this screen to enable or disable sharing of a USB printer via your Device. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 207 Chapter 14 USB Service To access this screen, click Network Setting > USB Service > Printer Server. Figure 101 Network Setting > USB Service > Printer Server The following table describes the labels in this menu. Table 73 Network Setting > USB Service > Print Server LABEL Printer Server DESCRIPTION Select Enable to have the Device share a USB printer. Printer Name Enter the name of the printer. Make and model Apply Cancel Enter the manufacturer and model number of the printer. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 208 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 15 Firewall 15.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the Devices security settings. Use the firewall to protect your Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it. By default the firewall:

allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks. blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN. The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4). Figure 102 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN A 1 2 3 4 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen to configure the security level of the firewall on the Device (Section 15.2 on page 211). Use the Service screen to add or remove predefined Internet services and configure firewall rules (Section 15.3 on page 211). Use the Access Control screen to view and configure incoming/outgoing filtering rules (Section 15.4 on page 213). Use the DoS screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks (Section 15.5 on page 216). VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 209 Chapter 15 Firewall 15.1.2 What You Need to Know SYN Attack A SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets. Each packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response. While the targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK, it queues up all outstanding SYN-ACK responses on a backlog queue. SYN-

ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates the three-way handshake. Once the queue is full, the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests, making the system unavailable for legitimate users. DoS Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources. The ZyXEL Device is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks. DDoS A DDoS attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single target, thereby causing denial of service for users of the targeted system. LAND Attack In a LAND attack, hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of the target system. This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself, making the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself. Ping of Death Ping of Death uses a "ping" utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum 65,536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification. This may cause systems to crash, hang or reboot. SPI Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is valid. Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context. For example, traffic from the WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN. 210 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 15 Firewall 15.2 The Firewall Screen Use this screen to set the security level of the firewall on the Device. Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply. Click Security > Firewall to display the General screen. Figure 103 Security > Firewall > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 74 Security > Firewall > General LABEL Firewall DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate the firewall feature on the Device. Easy Medium High Apply Cancel Select Easy to allow LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions. Select Medium to allow LAN to WAN but deny WAN to LAN packet directions. Select High to deny LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 15.3 The Service Screen You can configure customized services and port numbers in the Service screen. For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) website. See Appendix F on page 349 for some examples. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 211 Chapter 15 Firewall Click Security > Firewall > Service to display the following screen. Figure 104 Security > Firewall > Service The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 75 Security > Firewall > Service LABEL Add new service entry DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new service. Name This is the name of your customized service. Description This is the description of your customized service. Ports/Protocol Number This shows the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP) and the port number or range of ports that defines your customized service. Other and the protocol number displays if the service uses another IP protocol. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the entry. Click the Delete icon to remove this entry. 15.3.1 Add/Edit a Service Use this screen to add a customized service rule that you can use in the firewalls ACL rule configuration. Click Add new service entry or the edit icon next to an existing service rule in the Service screen to display the following screen. Figure 105 Service: Add/Edit 212 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 15 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 76 Service: Add/Edit LABEL Protocol DESCRIPTION Choose the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or Other) that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. Select Other to be able to enter a protocol number. Source/

Destination Port These fields are displayed if you select TCP or UDP as the IP port. Select Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service. If you select Any, the service is applied to all ports. Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service. Protocol Number Add Rule List Protocol This field is displayed if you select Other as the protocol. Enter the protocol number of your customized port. Click this to add the protocol to the Rule List below. This is the IP port (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or Other) that defines your customized port. Ports/Protocol Number For TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP protocol rules this shows the port number or range that defines the custom service. For other IP protocol rules this shows the protocol number. Modify Click the Delete icon to remove the rule. Service Name Enter a unique name (up to 32 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces) for your customized port. Service Description Apply Cancel Enter a description for your customized port. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 15.4 The Access Control Screen Click Security > Firewall > Access Control to display the following screen. This screen displays a list of the configured incoming or outgoing filtering rules. Figure 106 Security > Firewall > Access Control VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 213 Chapter 15 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 77 Security > Firewall > Access Control LABEL DoS Protection DESCRIPTION DoS (Denial of Service) attacks can flood your Internet connection with invalid packets and connection requests, using so much bandwidth and so many resources that Internet access becomes unavailable. Add new ACL rule

Name Src IP Dst IP Service Action Select the Enable check box to enable protection against DoS attacks. Click this to go to add a filter rule for incoming or outgoing IP traffic. This is the index number of the entry. This displays the name of the rule. This displays the source IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank source address is equivalent to Any. This displays the destination IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank destination address is equivalent to Any. This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service and the direction of traffic to which this rule applies. This field displays whether the rule silently discards packets (DROP), discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender

(REJECT) or allows the passage of packets (ACCEPT). Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. Click the Move To icon to change the order of the rule. Enter the number in the # field. 214 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 15.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule Click Add new ACL rule or the Edit icon next to an existing ACL rule in the Access Control screen. The following screen displays. Figure 107 Access Control: Add/Edit Chapter 15 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 78 Access Control: Add/Edit LABEL Filter Name DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters, not including spaces, underscores, and dashes. You must enter the filter name to add an ACL rule. This field is read-only if you are editing the ACL rule. Order Select the order of the ACL rule. Select Source Device Select the source device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific IP Address, enter the source IP address in the field below. Source IP Address Select Destination Device Destination IP Address Enter the source IP address. Select the destination device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific IP Address, enter the destiniation IP address in the field below. Enter the destination IP address. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 215 Chapter 15 Firewall Table 78 Access Control: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL IP Type DESCRIPTION Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6. Select Protocol Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. The specific protocol rule sets you add in the Security > Firewall > Service >

Add screen display in this list. If you want to configure a customized protocol, select Specific Service. Protocol This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol. Custom Source Port Custom Destination Port Policy Choose the IP port (TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, or ICMPv6) that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol. Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source. This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol. Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the destination. Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (DROP), deny and send an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender of (REJECT) or allow the passage of

(ACCEPT) packets that match this rule. Direction Use the drop-down list box to select the direction of traffic to which this rule applies. Enable Rate Limit Select this check box to set a limit on the upstream/downstream transmission rate for the specified protocol. Specify how many packets per minute or second the transmission rate is. Scheduler Rules Select a schedule rule for this ACL rule form the drop-down list box. You can configure a new schedule rule by click Add New Rule. This will bring you to the Security > Scheduler Rules screen. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 15.5 The DoS Screen DoS (Denial of Service) attacks can flood your Internet connection with invalid packets and connection requests, using so much bandwidth and so many resources that Internet access becomes unavailable. Use the DoS screen to activate protection against DoS attacks. Click Security > Firewall > DoS to display the following screen. Figure 108 Security > Firewall > DoS 216 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 15 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 79 Security > Firewall > DoS LABEL DoS Protection Blocking DESCRIPTION Select Enable to enable protection against DoS attacks. Deny Ping Response Apply Cancel Select Enable to block ping request packets. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 217 Chapter 15 Firewall 218 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 16 MAC Filter 16.1 Overview You can configure the Device to permit access to clients based on their MAC addresses in the MAC Filter screen. This applies to wired and wireless connections. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen. 16.2 The MAC Filter Screen Use this screen to allow wireless and LAN clients access to the Device. Click Security > MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. Figure 109 Security > MAC Filter VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 219 Chapter 16 MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 80 Security > MAC Filter LABEL MAC Address Filter Select Enable to activate the MAC filter function. DESCRIPTION Set Allow Host name MAC Address Apply Cancel This is the index number of the MAC address. Select Allow to permit access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the Device. If you clear this, the MAC Address field for this set clears. Enter the host name of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the Device. Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 220 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 17 Parental Control 17.1 Overview Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL. You can also define time periods and days during which the Device performs parental control on a specific user. 17.2 The Parental Control Screen Use this screen to enable parental control, view the parental control rules and schedules. Click Security > Parental Control to open the following screen. Figure 110 Security > Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 81 Security > Parental Control LABEL Parental Control DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate parental control. Add new PCP Click this if you want to configure a new parental control rule.

Status This shows the index number of the rule. This indicates whether the rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. PCP Name This shows the name of the rule. Home Network User (MAC) This shows the MAC address of the LAN users computer to which this rule applies. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 221 Chapter 17 Parental Control Table 81 Security > Parental Control (continued) LABEL Internet Access Schedule DESCRIPTION This shows the day(s) and time on which parental control is enabled. Network Service This shows whether the network service is configured. If not, None will be shown. Website Block This shows whether the website block is configured. If not, None will be shown. Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Apply Cancel Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 17.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Rule Click Add new PCP in the Parental Control screen to add a new rule or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to edit it. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule and/or URL filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites. Figure 111 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit 222 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 17 Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 82 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit LABEL General DESCRIPTION Active Select the checkbox to activate this parental control rule. Parental Control Profile Name Home Network User Enter a descriptive name for the rule. Select the LAN user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop-down list box. If you select Custom, enter the LAN users MAC address. If you select All, the rule applies to all LAN users. Internet Access Schedule Day Time Network Service Select check boxes for the days that you want the Device to perform parental control. Drag the time bar to define the time that the LAN user is allowed access. Network Service Setting If you select Block, the Device prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs listed below. If you select Allow, the Device blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below. Add new service

Click this to show a screen in which you can add a new service rule. You can configure the Service Name, Protocol, and Name of the new rule. This shows the index number of the rule. Select the checkbox next to the rule to activate it. Service Name This shows the name of the rule. Protocol:Port This shows the protocol and the port of the rule. Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Blocked Site/

URL Keyword Click Add to show a screen to enter the URL of web site or URL keyword to which the Device blocks access. Click Delete to remove it. Apply Cancel Click this button to save your settings back to the Device. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 223 Chapter 17 Parental Control 224 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 18 Scheduler Rules 18.1 Overview You can define time periods and days during which the Device performs scheduled rules of certain features (such as Firewall Access Control, Parental Control) on a specific user in the Scheduler Rules screen. 18.2 The Scheduler Rules Screen Use this screen to view, add, or edit time schedule rules. Click Security > Scheduler Rules to open the following screen. Figure 112 Security > Scheduler Rules The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 83 Security > Scheduler Rules LABEL Add new rule DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new rule.

This is the index number of the entry. Rule Name This shows the name of the rule. Day Time This shows the day(s) on which this rule is enabled. This shows the period of time on which this rule is enabled. Description This shows the description of this rule. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the schedule. Click the Delete icon to delete a scheduler rule. Note: You cannot delete a scheduler rule once it is applied to a certain feature. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 225 Chapter 18 Scheduler Rules 18.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule Click the Add button in the Scheduler Rules screen or click the Edit icon next to a schedule rule to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule for a specific user on your network. Figure 113 Scheduler Rules: Add/Edit The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 84 Scheduler Rules: Add/Edit LABEL Rule Name DESCRIPTION Enter a name (up to 31 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces) for this schedule. Day Time if Day Range Description Apply Cancel Select check boxes for the days that you want the Device to perform this scheduler rule. Enter the time period of each day, in 24-hour format, during which parental control will be enforced. Enter a description for this scheduler rule. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 226 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 19 Certificates 19.1 Overview The Device can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owners identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication. 19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Local Certificates screen lets you generate certification requests and import the Device's CA-signed certificates (Section 19.4 on page 231). The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the Device (Section 19.4 on page 231). 19.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Certification Authority A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the Device to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 227 Chapter 19 Certificates 19.3 The Local Certificates Screen Click Security > Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen. This is the Devices summary list of certificates and certification requests. Figure 114 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 85 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates LABEL Private Key is protected by a password?

DESCRIPTION Select the checkbox and enter the private key into the text box to store it on the Device. The private key should not exceed 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces). Browse... Click this to find the certificate file you want to upload. Import Certificate Click this button to save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification authority from your computer to the Device. Create Certificate Request Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the Device generate a certification request. Current File Subject Issuer Valid From Valid To Modify This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name. This field displays identifying information about the certificates owner, such as CN

(Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country. This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired. Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate (or certification request). For a certification request, click Load Signed to import the signed certificate. Click the Remove icon to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use. 228 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 19.3.1 Create Certificate Request Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Create Certificate Request to open the following screen. Use this screen to have the Device generate a certification request. Figure 115 Create Certificate Request Chapter 19 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 86 Create Certificate Request LABEL Certificate Name DESCRIPTION Type up to 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate. Common Name Select Auto to have the Device configure this field automatically. Or select Customize to enter it manually. Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-mail address in the field provided. The domain name or e-mail address can be up to 63 ASCII characters. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string. Organization Name Type up to 63 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs. You may use any character, including spaces, but the Device drops trailing spaces. State/Province Name Type up to 32 characters to identify the state or province where the certificate owner is located. You may use any character, including spaces, but the Device drops trailing spaces. Country/Region Name Apply Cancel Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. After you click Apply, the following screen displays to notify you that you need to get the certificate request signed by a Certificate Authority. If you already have, click Load_Signed to import the signed certificate into the Device. Otherwise click Back to return to the Local Certificates screen. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 229 Chapter 19 Certificates Figure 116 Certificate Request Created 19.3.2 Load Signed Certificate After you create a certificate request and have it signed by a Certificate Authority, in the Local Certificates screen click the certificate requests Load Signed icon to import the signed certificate into the Device. Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificates filename before you can import it. Figure 117 Load Signed Certificate 230 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 19 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 87 Load Signed Certificate LABEL Certificate Name DESCRIPTION This is the name of the signed certificate. Certificate Copy and paste the signed certificate into the text box to store it on the Device. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 19.4 The Trusted CA Screen Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the following screen. This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the Device to accept as trusted. The Device accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities. Figure 118 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 88 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA LABEL Import Certificate DESCRIPTION Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust to the Device.

Name Subject Type Modify This is the index number of the entry. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), OU (Organizational Unit or department), Organization (O), State (ST) and Country (C). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate (or certification request). Click the Remove button to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 231 Chapter 19 Certificates 19.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate Click the View icon in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certification authoritys certificate. Figure 119 Trusted CA: View The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 89 Trusted CA: View LABEL Name DESCRIPTION This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. Type Subject Certificate This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and Country (C). This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). Back Click Back to return to the previous screen. 232 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 19.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate Click the Import Certificate button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. The Device trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates. Figure 120 Trusted CA: Import Certificate Chapter 19 Certificates The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 90 Trusted CA: Import Certificate LABEL Certificate File Path DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the certificate you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Enable Trusted CA for 802.1x Authentication If you select this checkbox, the trusted CA will be used for 802.1x authentication. The selected trusted CA will be displayed in the Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x:

Edit screen. Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the Device. OK Cancel Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 233 Chapter 19 Certificates 234 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 20 Log 20.1 Overview The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the Device log and then display the logs or have the Device send them to an administrator (as e-mail) or to a syslog server. 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the System Log screen to see the system logs (Section 20.2 on page 236). Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select

(Section 20.3 on page 237). 20.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. Alerts and Logs An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks

(access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black. Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server. Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels. Table 91 Syslog Severity Levels CODE 0 SEVERITY Emergency: The system is unusable. 1 2 3 4 Alert: Action must be taken immediately. Critical: The system condition is critical. Error: There is an error condition on the system. Warning: There is a warning condition on the system. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 235 Chapter 20 Log Table 91 Syslog Severity Levels CODE 5 SEVERITY Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system. 6 7 Informational: The syslog contains an informational message. Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes. 20.2 The System Log Screen Use the System Log screen to see the system logs. Click System Monitor > Log to open the System Log screen. Figure 121 System Monitor > Log > System Log The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 92 System Monitor > Log > System Log LABEL Level DESCRIPTION Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher. Category Clear Log Refresh Select the type of logs to display. Click this to delete all the logs. Click this to renew the log screen. Export Log Click this to export the selected log(s). Email Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the Maintenance >

Logs Setting screen. System Log

Time Facility Level This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the time the log was recorded. The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details. This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server. Messages This field states the reason for the log. 236 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 20.3 The Security Log Screen Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select. Click System Monitor > Log > Security Log to open the following screen. Figure 122 System Monitor > Log > Security Log Chapter 20 Log The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 93 System Monitor > Log > Security Log LABEL Level DESCRIPTION Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher. Category Clear Log Refresh Select the type of logs to display. Click this to delete all the logs. Click this to renew the log screen. Export Log Click this to export the selected log(s). Email Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the Maintenance >

Logs Setting screen.

Time Facility Level This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the time the log was recorded. The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details. This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server. Messages This field states the reason for the log. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 237 Chapter 20 Log 238 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 21 Traffic Status 21.1 Overview Use the Traffic Status screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN and LAN interfaces. 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics (Section 21.2 on page 239). Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics (Section 21.3 on page 241). 21.2 The WAN Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status to open the WAN screen. The figure in this screen shows the number of bytes received and sent on the Device. Figure 123 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 239 Chapter 21 Traffic Status The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 94 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN LABEL Connected Interface DESCRIPTION This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected. Packets Sent Data Error Drop Packets Received Data Error Drop more...hide more Disabled Interface Packets Sent Data Error Drop Packets Received This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. Click more... to show more information. Click hide more to hide them. This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently disconnected. This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Data Error Drop This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. 240 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 21.3 The LAN Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN to open the following screen. The figure in this screen shows the interface that is currently connected on the Device. Figure 124 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN Chapter 21 Traffic Status The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 95 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN LABEL Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen. DESCRIPTION Interface Bytes Sent more...hide more Interface Sent (Packets) Data Error Drop This shows the LAN or WLAN interface. This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface. Click more... to show more information. Click hide more to hide them. This shows the LAN or WLAN interface. This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Received (Packets) Data Error Drop This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 241 Chapter 21 Traffic Status 242 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 22 ARP Table 22.1 Overview Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on the local area network. An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address. 22.1.1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the device, the device's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and, if it finds the address, sends it to the device. If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN. The device fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the device puts all ones in the target MAC field (FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied. 22.2 ARP Table Screen Use the ARP table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s). To open this screen, click System Monitor > ARP Table. Figure 125 System Monitor > ARP Table The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 96 System Monitor > ARP Table LABEL

DESCRIPTION This is the ARP table entry number. IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a port. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 243 Chapter 22 ARP Table Table 96 System Monitor > ARP Table (continued) LABEL MAC Address DESCRIPTION This is the MAC address of the device with the listed IP address. Device This is the type of interface used by the device. You can click on the device type to go to its configuration screen. 244 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 23 Routing Table 23.1 Overview Routing is based on the destination address only and the Device takes the shortest path to forward a packet. 23.2 The Routing Table Screen Click System Monitor > Routing Table to open the following screen. Figure 126 System Monitor > Routing Table The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 97 System Monitor > Routing Table LABEL Destination DESCRIPTION This indicates the destination IP address of this route. Gateway This indicates the IP address of the gateway that helps forward this routes traffic. Subnet Mask This indicates the destination subnet mask of this route. Flag This indicates the route status. U-Up: The route is up.

!-Reject: The route is blocked and will force a route lookup to fail. G-Gateway: The route uses a gateway to forward traffic. H-Host: The target of the route is a host. R-Reinstate: The route is reinstated for dynamic routing. D-Dynamic (redirect): The route is dynamically installed by a routing daemon or redirect. M-Modified (redirect): The route is modified from a routing daemon or redirect. Metric The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". The smaller the number, the lower the "cost". VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 245 Chapter 23 Routing Table Table 97 System Monitor > Routing Table (continued) LABEL Service DESCRIPTION This indicates the name of the service used to forward the route. Interface This indicates the name of the interface through which the route is forwarded. br0 indicates the LAN interface. ptm0 indicates the WAN interface using IPoE or in bridge mode. ppp0 indicates the WAN interface using PPPoE. 246 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 24 IGMP Status 24.1 Overview Use the IGMP Status screens to look at IGMP group status and traffic statistics. 24.2 The IGMP Group Status Screen Use this screen to look at the current list of multicast groups the Device has joined and which ports have joined it. To open this screen, click System Monitor > IGMP Group Status. Figure 127 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 98 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status LABEL Interface DESCRIPTION This field displays the name of an interface on the Device that belongs to an IGMP multicast group. Multicast Group This field displays the name of the IGMP multicast group to which the interface belongs. Filter Mode INCLUDE means that only the IP addresses in the Source List get to receive the multicast groups traffic. EXCLUDE means that the IP addresses in the Source List are not allowed to receive the multicast groups traffic but other IP addresses can. Source List This is the list of IP addresses that are allowed or not allowed to receive the multicast groups traffic depending on the filter mode. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 247 Chapter 24 IGMP Status 248 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 25 xDSL Statistics 25.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen Use this screen to view detailed DSL statistics. Click System Monitor > xDSL Statistics to open the following screen. Figure 128 System Monitor > xDSL Statistics VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 249 Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 99 Status > xDSL Statistics LABEL Refresh Interval DESCRIPTION Select the time interval for refreshing statistics. Line Select which DSL lines statistics you want to display. xDSL Training Status Mode Traffic Type Link Uptime xDSL Port Details Upstream This displays the current state of setting up the DSL connection. This displays the ITU standard used for this connection. This displays the type of traffic the DSL port is sending and receiving. Inactive displays if the DSL port is not currently sending or receiving traffic. This displays how long the port has been running (or connected) since the last time it was started. These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service provider. Downstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service provider. Line Rate These are the data transfer rates at which the port is sending and receiving data. Actual Net Data Rate These are the rates at which the port is sending and receiving the payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic. Trellis Coding SNR Margin Actual Delay This displays whether or not the port is using Trellis coding for traffic it is sending and receiving. Trellis coding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions. Trellis may reduce throughput but it makes the connection more stable. This is the upstream and downstream Signal-to-Noise Ratio margin (in dB). A DMT sub-

carriers SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power. The signal-to-noise ratio margin is the maximum that the received noise power could increase with the system still being able to meet its transmission targets. This is the upstream and downstream interleave delay. It is the wait (in milliseconds) that determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved (assembled) and then transmitted. Interleave delay is used when transmission error correction (Reed- Solomon) is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line. The bigger the delay, the bigger the data block size, allowing better error correction to be performed. Transmit Power This is the upstream and downstream far end actual aggregate transmit power (in dBm). Upstream is how much power the port is using to transmit to the service provider. Downstream is how much port the service provider is using to transmit to the port. Receive Power Upstream is how much power the service provider is receiving from the port. Downstream is how much power the port is receiving from the service provider. Actual INP Sudden spikes in the lines level of external noise (impulse noise) can cause errors and result in lost packets. This could especially impact the quality of multimedia traffic such as voice or video. Impulse noise protection (INP) provides a buffer to allow for correction of errors caused by error correction to deal with this. The number of DMT (Discrete Multi-

Tone) symbols shows the level of impulse noise protection for the upstream and downstream traffic. A higher symbol value provides higher error correction capability, but it causes overhead and higher delay which may increase error rates in received multimedia data. Total Attenuation This is the upstream and downstream line attenuation, measured in decibels (dB). This Attainable Net Data Rate xDSL Counters 250 attenuation is the difference between the power transmitted at the near-end and the power received at the far-end. Attenuation is affected by the channel characteristics (wire gauge, quality, condition and length of the physical line). These are the highest theoretically possible transfer rates at which the port could send and receive payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics Table 99 Status > xDSL Statistics (continued) LABEL Downstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service DESCRIPTION provider. Upstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service provider. FEC CRC ES SES UAS LOS LOF LOM This is the number of Far End Corrected blocks. This is the number of Cyclic Redundancy Checks. This is the number of Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing at least one errored block or at least one defect. This is the number of Severely Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing 30% or more errored blocks or at least one defect. This is a subset of ES. This is the number of UnAvailable Seconds. This is the number of Loss Of Signal seconds. This is the number of Loss Of Frame seconds. This is the number of Loss of Margin seconds. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 251 Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics 252 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 26 User Account 26.1 Overview In the Users Account screen, you can change the password of the user account that you used to log in the Device. 26.2 The User Account Screen Click Maintenance > User Account to open the following screen. Figure 129 Maintenance > User Account The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 100 Maintenance > User Account LABEL User Name DESCRIPTION This field displays the name of the account that you used to log in the system. Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field. New Password Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type. After you change the password, use the new password to access the Device. Retype to confirm Apply Cancel Type the new password again for confirmation. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 253 Chapter 26 User Account 254 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 27 Remote Management 27.1 Overview Remote Management allows you to manage your Device from a remote location through the following interfaces:

LAN WAN Trust Domain Note: The Device is managed using the Web Configurator. 27.2 The Remote MGMT Screen Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) users can use which service(s) to manage the Device. Click Maintenance > Remote MGMT to open the following screen. Figure 130 Maintenance > Remote MGMT VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 255 Chapter 27 Remote Management The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 101 Maintenance > Remote MGMT LABEL Trust Domain DESCRIPTION Status This field displays whether the Trust Domain is active or not. IP Address Enter the Trust Domain IP address. Services LAN/WLAN WAN This is the service you may use to access the Device. Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the Device from the LAN/WLAN. Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the Device from the WAN. Trust Domain Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the Device from the Trust Domain. Port Certificate HTTPS Certificate Apply Cancel You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select a certificate the HTTPS server (the Device) uses to authenticate itself to the HTTPS client. You must have certificates already configured in the Certificates screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 256 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 28 TR-069 Client 28.1 Overview This chapter explains how to configure the Devices TR-069 auto-configuration settings. 28.2 The TR-069 Client Screen TR-069 defines how Customer Premise Equipment (CPE), for example your Device, can be managed over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS). TR-069 is based on sending Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs) between an ACS and a client device. RPCs are sent in Extensible Markup Language (XML) format over HTTP or HTTPS. An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the Device, modify settings, perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the Device. You have to enable the device to be managed by the ACS and specify the ACS IP address or domain name and username and password. Click Maintenance > TR-069 Client to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure your Device to be managed by an ACS. Figure 131 Maintenance > TR-069 Client VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 257 Chapter 28 TR-069 Client The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 102 Maintenance > TR-069 Client LABEL Inform DESCRIPTION Select Enable for the Device to send periodic inform via TR-069 on the WAN. Otherwise, select Disable. Inform Interval Enter the time interval (in seconds) at which the Device sends information to the auto-

configuration server. ACS URL Enter the URL or IP address of the auto-configuration server. ACS User Name Enter the TR-069 user name for authentication with the auto-configuration server. ACS Password Enter the TR-069 password for authentication with the auto-configuration server. WAN Interface used by TR-069 client Display SOAP messages on serial console Connection Request Authentication Connection Request User Name Connection Request Password Connection Request URL Local certificate used by TR-069 client Apply Cancel Select a WAN interface through which the TR-069 traffic passes. If you select Any_WAN, you should also select the pre-configured WAN connection(s). Select Enable to show the SOAP messages on the console. Select this option to enable authentication when there is a connection request from the ACS. Enter the connection request user name. When the ACS makes a connection request to the Device, this user name is used to authenticate the ACS. Enter the connection request password. When the ACS makes a connection request to the Device, this password is used to authenticate the ACS. This shows the connection request URL. The ACS can use this URL to make a connection request to the Device. You can choose a local certificate used by TR-069 client. The local certificate should be imported in the Security > Certificates > Local Certificates screen. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 258 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 29 TR-064 29.1 Overview This chapter explains how to configure the Devices TR-064 auto-configuration settings. 29.2 The TR-064 Screen TR-064 is a LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum. TR-064 is built on top of UPnP. It allows the users to use a TR-064 compliant CPE management application on their computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and configure user-specific parameters, such as the username and password. Click Maintenance > TR-064 to open the following screen. Figure 132 Maintenance > TR-064 The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 103 Maintenance > TR-064 LABEL State DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate management via TR-064 on the LAN. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 259 Chapter 29 TR-064 260 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 30 Time Settings 30.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password, name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval. 30.2 The Time Screen To change your Devices time and date, click Maintenance > Time. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the Devices time based on your local time zone. Figure 133 Maintenance > Time Setting VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 261 Chapter 30 Time Settings The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 104 Maintenance > Time Setting LABEL Current Date/Time DESCRIPTION Current Time This field displays the time of your Device. Each time you reload this page, the Device synchronizes the time with the time server. Current Date This field displays the date of your Device. Each time you reload this page, the Device synchronizes the date with the time server. NTP Time Server First ~ Fifth NTP time server Time Zone Time zone offset Daylight Saving State Start rule:

End rule Select an NTP time server from the drop-down list box. Otherwise, select Other and enter the IP address or URL (up to 29 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Select None if you dont want to configure the time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Daylight Saving Time is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Select Enable if you use Daylight Saving Time. Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you enabled Daylight Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month. The Time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States, set the day to Second, Sunday, the month to March and the time to 2 in the Hour field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment

(1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday and the month to March. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you enabled Daylight Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month. The Time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would set the day to First, Sunday, the month to November and the time to 2 in the Hour field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment

(1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday, and the month to October. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). 262 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 30 Time Settings Table 104 Maintenance > Time Setting (continued) LABEL Apply DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes. Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 263 Chapter 30 Time Settings 264 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 31 E-mail Notification 31.1 Overview A mail server is an application or a computer that runs such an application to receive, forward and deliver e-mail messages. To have the Device send reports, logs or notifications via e-mail, you must specify an e-mail server and the e-mail addresses of the sender and receiver. 31.2 The Email Notification Screen Click Maintenance > Email Notification to open the Email Notification screen. Use this screen to view, remove and add mail server information on the Device. Figure 134 Maintenance > Email Notification The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 105 Maintenance > Email Notification LABEL Add New Email DESCRIPTION Click this button to create a new entry. Mail Server Address This field displays the server name or the IP address of the mail server. Username This field displays the user name of the senders mail account. Password This field displays the password of the senders mail account. Email Address This field displays the e-mail address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the e-

mail that the Device sends. Remove Click this button to delete the selected entry(ies). VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 265 Chapter 31 E-mail Notification 31.2.1 Email Notification Edit Click the Add button in the Email Notification screen. Use this screen to configure the required information for sending e-mail via a mail server. Figure 135 Email Notification > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 106 Email Notification > Add LABEL Mail Server Address DESCRIPTION Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail address specified in the Account Email Address field. If this field is left blank, reports, logs or notifications will not be sent via e-mail. Authentication Username Enter the user name (up to 32 characters). This is usually the user name of a mail account you specified in the Account Email Address field. Authentication Password Enter the password associated with the user name above. Account Email Address Enter the e-mail address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the e-mail notification that the Device sends. If you activate SSL/TLS authentication, the e-mail address must be able to be authenticated by the mail server as well. Apply Cancel Click this button to save your changes and return to the previous screen. Click this button to begin configuring this screen afresh. 266 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 32 Logs Setting 32.1 Overview You can configure where the Device sends logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the Device records in the Logs Setting screen. 32.2 The Log Settings Screen To change your Devices log settings, click Maintenance > Logs Setting. The screen appears as shown. Figure 136 Maintenance > Logs Setting VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 267 Chapter 32 Logs Setting The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 107 Maintenance > Logs Setting LABEL Syslog Setting DESCRIPTION Syslog Logging The Device sends a log to an external syslog server. Select Enable to enable syslog logging. Mode Select the syslog destination from the drop-down list box. If you select Remote, the log(s) will be sent to a remote syslog server. If you select Local File, the log(s) will be saved in a local file. If you want to send the log(s) to a remote syslog server and save it in a local file, select Local File and Remote. Syslog Server Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs. UDP Port Enter the port number used by the syslog server. E-mail Log Settings Mail Server System Log Mail Subject Security Log Mail Subject Send Log to Send Alarm to Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail addresses specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will not be sent via E-mail. Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the system log e-mail message that the Device sends. Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the security log e-mail message that the Device sends. The Device sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, the Device does not send logs via E-mail. Alerts are real-time notifications that are sent as soon as an event, such as a DoS attack, system error, or forbidden web access attempt occurs. Enter the E-mail address where the alert messages will be sent. Alerts include system errors, attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites. If this field is left blank, alert messages will not be sent via E-mail. Alarm Interval Specify how often the alarm should be updated. Allowed Capacity Before Email Clear log after sending mail Set what percent of the Devices log storage space can be filled before the Device sends a log e-mail. Select this to delete all the logs after the Device sends an E-mail of the logs. Active Log and Alert System Log Select the categories of system logs that you want to record. Security Log Select the categories of security logs that you want to record. Send immediate alert Apply Cancel Select log categories for which you want the Device to send E-mail alerts immediately. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 32.2.1 Example E-mail Log An "End of Log" message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent. The following is an example of a log sent by e-mail. You may edit the subject title. The date format here is Day-Month-Year. The date format here is Month-Day-Year. The time format is Hour-Minute-Second. 268 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 32 Logs Setting

"End of Log" message shows that a complete log has been sent. Figure 137 E-mail Log Example Subject:

Firewall Alert From Date:

Fri, 07 Apr 2000 10:05:42 From:

user@zyxel.com To:

user@zyxel.com 1|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward

| 09:54:03 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |

2|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward

| 09:54:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |

3|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.6 To:10.10.10.10 |match |forward

| 09:54:19 |UDP src port:03516 dest port:00053 |<1,01> |

..{snip}.. .{snip}.. 126|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward 127|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

128|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:30 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

End of Firewall Log

| 10:05:00 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 269 Chapter 32 Logs Setting 270 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 33 Firmware Upgrade 33.1 Overview This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your Device. You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your devices performance. Only use firmware for your devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your Device. 33.2 The Firmware Screen Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. Do NOT turn off the Device while firmware upload is in progress!

Figure 138 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 108 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade LABEL Current Firmware Version DESCRIPTION This is the present Firmware version and the date created. File Path Browse... Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Upload Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 271 Chapter 33 Firmware Upgrade After you see the firmware updating screen, wait two minutes before logging into the Device again. Figure 139 Firmware Uploading The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 140 Network Temporarily Disconnected After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen. If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Firmware Upgrade screen. Figure 141 Error Message 272 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 34 Configuration 34.1 Overview The Configuration screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations. You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default. 34.2 The Configuration Screen Click Maintenance > Configuration. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next. Figure 142 Maintenance > Configuration Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the Devices current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Click Backup to save the Devices current configuration to your computer. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 273 Chapter 34 Configuration Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your Device. Table 109 Restore Configuration LABEL File Path DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Browse... Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them. Upload Click this to begin the upload process. Do not turn off the Device while configuration file upload is in progress. After the Device configuration has been restored successfully, the login screen appears. Login again to restart the Device. The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 143 Network Temporarily Disconnected If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1). See Appendix A on page 287 for details on how to set up your computers IP address. If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Configuration screen. Figure 144 Configuration Upload Error 274 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 34 Configuration Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the Device to its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears. Figure 145 Reset Warning Message Figure 146 Reset In Process Message You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your Device. Refer to Section on page 22 for more information on the RESET button. 34.3 The Reboot Screen System restart allows you to reboot the Device remotely without turning the power off. You may need to do this if the Device hangs, for example. Click Maintenance > Reboot. Click Reboot to have the Device reboot. This does not affect the Device's configuration. Figure 147 Maintenance > Reboot VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 275 CHAPTER 35 Diagnostic 35.1 Overview The Diagnostic screens display information to help you identify problems with the Device. The route between a CO VDSL switch and one of its CPE may go through switches owned by independent organizations. A connectivity fault point generally takes time to discover and impacts subscribers network access. In order to eliminate the management and maintenance efforts, IEEE 802.1ag is a Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) specification which allows network administrators to identify and manage connection faults. Through discovery and verification of the path, CFM can detect, analyze and isolate connectivity faults in bridged LANs. 35.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route packets take to a host (Section 35.3 on page 277). The 802.1ag screen lets you perform CFM actions (Section 35.5 on page 279). The OAM Ping Test screen lets you send an ATM OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) packet to verify the connectivity of a specific PVC. (Section 35.5 on page 279). 35.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. How CFM Works A Maintenance Association (MA) defines a VLAN and associated Maintenance End Point (MEP) ports on the device under a Maintenance Domain (MD) level. An MEP port has the ability to send Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) and get other MEP ports information from neighbor devices CCMs within an MA. CFM provides two tests to discover connectivity faults. Loopback test - checks if the MEP port receives its Loop Back Response (LBR) from its target after it sends the Loop Back Message (LBM). If no response is received, there might be a connectivity fault between them. Link trace test - provides additional connectivity fault analysis to get more information on where the fault is. If an MEP port does not respond to the source MEP, this may indicate a fault. Administrators can take further action to check and resume services from the fault according to the line connectivity status report. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 276 35.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup Use this screen to ping, traceroute, or nslookup an IP address. Click Maintenance > Diagnostic >

Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup to open the screen shown next. Figure 148 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup Chapter 35 Diagnostic The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 110 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup LABEL URL or IP Address DESCRIPTION Type the IP address of a computer that you want to perform ping, traceroute, or nslookup in order to test a connection. Ping TraceRoute Click this to ping the IP address that you entered. Click this button to perform the traceroute function. This determines the path a packet takes to the specified computer. Nslookup Click this button to perform a DNS lookup on the IP address of a computer you enter. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 277 Chapter 35 Diagnostic 35.4 802.1ag Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > 8.2.1ag to open the following screen. Use this screen to perform CFM actions. Figure 149 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 111 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag LABEL 802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management DESCRIPTION Maintenance Domain (MD) Level Destination MAC Address 802.1Q VLAN ID VDSL Traffic Type Select a level (0-7) under which you want to create an MA. Enter the target devices MAC address to which the Device performs a CFM loopback test. Type a VLAN ID (0-4095) for this MA. This shows whether the VDSL traffic is activated. Loopback Message (LBM) This shows how many Loop Back Messages (LBMs) are sent and if there is any inorder or outorder Loop Back Response (LBR) received from a remote MEP. Linktrace Message (LTM) This shows the destination MAC address in the Link Trace Response (LTR). Set MD Level Click this button to configure the MD (Maintenance Domain) level. Send Loopback Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LBM (Loop Back Message) to a specified remote end point. Send Linktrace Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LTMs (Link Trace Messages) to a specified remote end point. 278 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 35.5 OAM Ping Test Chapter 35 Diagnostic Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test to open the screen shown next. Use this screen to perform an OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) F4 or F5 loopback test on a PVC. The Device sends an OAM F4 or F5 packet to the DSLAM or ATM switch and then returns it to the Device. The test result then displays in the text box. ATM sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate. The terminology for virtual circuits is as follows:

Virtual Channel (VC) Logical connections between ATM devices Virtual Path (VP) A bundle of virtual channels Virtual Circuits A series of virtual paths between circuit end points Figure 150 Virtual Circuit Topology Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires. The cable connects two points and wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points. In an ATM cell header, a VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) identifies a link formed by a virtual path; a VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) identifies a channel within a virtual path. A series of virtual paths make up a virtual circuit. F4 cells operate at the virtual path (VP) level, while F5 cells operate at the virtual channel (VC) level. F4 cells use the same VPI as the user data cells on VP connections, but use different predefined VCI values. F5 cells use the same VPI and VCI as the user data cells on the VC connections, and are distinguished from data cells by a predefinded Payload Type Identifier (PTI) in the cell header. Both F4 flows and F5 flows are bidirectional and have two types. segment F4 flows (VCI=3) end-to-end F4 flows (VCI=4) segment F5 flows (PTI=100) end-to-end F5 flows (PTI=101) OAM F4 or F5 tests are used to check virtual path or virtual channel availability between two DSL devices. Segment flows are terminated at the connecting point which terminates a VP or VC segment. End-to-end flows are terminated at the end point of a VP or VC connection, where an ATM link is terminated. Segment loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of a PVC to the nearest neighboring ATM device. End-to-end loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of an end-to-end PVC. Note: The DSLAM to which the Device is connected must also support ATM F4 and/or F5 to use this test. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 279 Chapter 35 Diagnostic Note: This screen is available only when you configure an ATM layer-2 interface. Figure 151 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 112 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a PVC on which you want to perform the loopback test. F4 segment Press this to perform an OAM F4 segment loopback test. F4 end-end Press this to perform an OAM F4 end-to-end loopback test. F5 segment Press this to perform an OAM F5 segment loopback test. F5 end-end Press this to perform an OAM F5 end-to-end loopback test. 280 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide CHAPTER 36 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs Device Access and Login Internet Access Wireless Internet Access USB Device Connection UPnP 36.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs The Device does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. 1 Make sure the Device is turned on. 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Device. 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Device and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. 4 5 Turn the Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.5 on page 21. 2 3 4 Check the hardware connections. Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. Turn the Device off and on. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 281 Chapter 36 Troubleshooting 5 If the problem continues, contact the vendor. 36.2 Device Access and Login I forgot the IP address for the Device. 1 2 3 The default LAN IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the Device by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the Device (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section on page 22. I forgot the password. 1 2 The default admin password is 1234. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section on page 22. I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address. The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address (Section 8.2 on page 133), use the new IP address. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the Device. 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See Section 1.5 on page 21. 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled. See Appendix C on page 317. 4 5 282 If it is possible to log in from another interface, check the service control settings for HTTP and HTTPS (Maintenance > Remote MGMT). Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the Device with the default IP address. See Section on page 22. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Chapter 36 Troubleshooting 6 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions Make sure you have logged out of any earlier management sessions using the same user account even if they were through a different interface or using a different browser. Try to access the Device using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the Device, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the Device does not respond to HTTP. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the Device. 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default admin password is 1234. The field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 2 3 4 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the Device. Log out of the Device in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out. Turn the Device off and on. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 36.1 on page 281. I cannot Telnet to the Device. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new firmware. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. 36.3 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 283 Chapter 36 Troubleshooting 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 21. 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the Network Setting >

Broadband screen. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure that you enabled the wireless LAN in the Device and your wireless client and that the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the Device. 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device and reconnect them. 5 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. I cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection. 1 Make sure you have the DSL WAN port connected to a telephone jack (or the DSL or modem jack on a splitter if you have one). 2 Make sure you configured a proper DSL WAN interface (Network Setting > Broadband screen) with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled. 3 4 Check that the LAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the DSL connection (Network Setting > Interface Group). If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISPs DHCP server. I cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection. ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time. You can only use one type of DSL connection, either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time. I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the Device), but my Internet connection is not available anymore. 1 2 3 4 284 Your session with the Device may have expired. Try logging into the Device again. Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 21. Turn the Device off and on. If the problem continues, contact your ISP. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 36.4 Wireless Internet Access Chapter 36 Troubleshooting What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection? How can I solve this problem?

The following factors may cause interference:

Obstacles: walls, ceilings, furniture, and so on. Building Materials: metal doors, aluminum studs. Electrical devices: microwaves, monitors, electric motors, cordless phones, and other wireless devices. To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection, you can:

Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low. Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding wireless electronics such as cordless phones. Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles (such as walls and ceilings) between the AP and the wireless client. Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously, or add additional APs if necessary. Try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information, it may have too many programs open that use the Internet. What is a Server Set ID (SSID)?

An SSID is a name that uniquely identifies a wireless network. The AP and all the clients within a wireless network must use the same SSID. What wireless security modes does my Device support?

Wireless security is vital to your network. It protects communications between wireless stations, access points and the wired network. The available security modes in your Device are as follows:

WPA2-PSK: (recommended) This uses a pre-shared key with the WPA2 standard. WPA-PSK: This has the device use either WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depending on which security mode the wireless client uses. WPA2: WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. It requires the use of a RADIUS server and is mostly used in business networks. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 285 Chapter 36 Troubleshooting WPA: Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. It requires the use of a RADIUS server and is mostly used in business networks. WEP: Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private. 36.5 USB Device Connection The Device fails to detect my USB device. 1 Disconnect the USB device. 2 3 4 Reboot the Device. If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on. Re-connect your USB device to the Device. 36.6 UPnP When using UPnP and the Device reboots, my computer cannot detect UPnP and refresh My Network Places > Local Network. 1 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the Devices LAN port or from your computer. 2 Re-connect the Ethernet cable. The Local Area Connection icon for UPnP disappears in the screen. Restart your computer. I cannot open special applications such as white board, file transfer and video when I use the MSN messenger. 1 Wait more than three minutes. 2 Restart the applications. 286 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide APPENDIX A Setting up Your Computers IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP/IP installed. Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP/IP on your computer. Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a third-party TCP/IP application package. TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems. After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP settings in order to

"communicate" with your network. If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the Devices LAN port. Windows 95/98/Me Click Start, Settings, Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to open the Network window. Figure 152 WIndows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 287 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Installing Components The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components. You need a network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks. If you need the adapter:

In the Network window, click Add. Select Adapter and then click Add. Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK. If you need TCP/IP:

In the Network window, click Add. Select Protocol and then click Add. Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. Select TCP/IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK. If you need Client for Microsoft Networks:

Click Add. Select Client and then click Add. Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK. Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 Configuring 1 2 In the Network window Configuration tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP entry and click Properties Click the IP Address tab. If your IP address is dynamic, select Obtain an IP address automatically. 288 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address If you have a static IP address, select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields. Figure 153 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab. If you do not know your DNS information, select Disable DNS. If you know your DNS information, select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below (you may not need to fill them all in). Figure 154 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 289 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 4 5 6 7 Click the Gateway tab. If you do not know your gateways IP address, remove previously installed gateways. If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the New gateway field and click Add. Click OK to save and close the TCP/IP Properties window. Click OK to close the Network window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted. Turn on your Device and restart your computer when prompted. Verifying Settings 1 2 3 Click Start and then Run. In the Run window, type "winipcfg" and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window. Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet mask and default gateway. Windows 2000/NT/XP The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme. 1 Click start (Start in Windows 2000/NT), Settings, Control Panel. Figure 155 Windows XP: Start Menu 290 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address In the Control Panel, double-click Network Connections (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT). Figure 156 Windows XP: Control Panel Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties. Figure 157 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties 2 3 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 291 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 4 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (under the General tab in Win XP) and then click Properties. Figure 158 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties 5 The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens (the General tab in Windows XP). If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically. If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields. 292 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Click Advanced. Figure 159 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 6 If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK. Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:

In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add. In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask, and then click Add. Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add. Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways. In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric. Click Add. Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 293 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Click OK when finished. Figure 160 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties 7 In the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window (the General tab in Windows XP):

Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address(es). If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields. 294 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them. Figure 161 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 8 9 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. Click Close (OK in Windows 2000/NT) to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. 10 Close the Network Connections window (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT). 11 Turn on your Device and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings 1 2 Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt. In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab. Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Enterprise Version 6.0. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 295 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 1 2 Click the Start icon, Control Panel. Figure 162 Windows Vista: Start Menu In the Control Panel, double-click Network and Internet. Figure 163 Windows Vista: Control Panel 3 Click Network and Sharing Center. Figure 164 Windows Vista: Network And Internet 296 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 4 Click Manage network connections. Figure 165 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center 5 Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties. Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. Figure 166 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 297 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click Properties. Figure 167 Windows Vista: Local Area Connection Properties 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens (the General tab). If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically. If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields. 298 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Click Advanced. Figure 168 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties 8 If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK. Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:

In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add. In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask, and then click Add. Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add. Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways. In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric. Click Add. Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 299 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Click OK when finished. Figure 169 Windows Vista: Advanced TCP/IP Properties 9 In the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window, (the General tab):

Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address(es). If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields. 300 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them. Figure 170 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties 10 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window. 11 Click Close to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. 12 Close the Network Connections window. 13 Turn on your Device and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings 1 2 Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt. In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 301 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Macintosh OS 8/9 1 Click the Apple menu, Control Panel and double-click TCP/IP to open the TCP/IP Control Panel. Figure 171 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu 302 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 2 Select Ethernet built-in from the Connect via list. Figure 172 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP 3 4 5 6 7 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP Server from the Configure: list. For statically assigned settings, do the following:

From the Configure box, select Manually. Type your IP address in the IP Address box. Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. Type the IP address of your Device in the Router address box. Close the TCP/IP Control Panel. Click Save if prompted, to save changes to your configuration. Turn on your Device and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties in the TCP/IP Control Panel window. Macintosh OS X 1 Click the Apple menu, and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window. Figure 173 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu 2 Click Network in the icon bar. Select Automatic from the Location list. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 303 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Select Built-in Ethernet from the Show list. Click the TCP/IP tab. 3 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure list. Figure 174 Macintosh OS X: Network 4 5 6 For statically assigned settings, do the following:

From the Configure box, select Manually. Type your IP address in the IP Address box. Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. Type the IP address of your Device in the Router address box. Click Apply Now and close the window. Turn on your Device and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties in the Network window. 304 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Linux This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9.0. Procedure, screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Using the K Desktop Environment (KDE) Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE. 1 Click the Red Hat button (located on the bottom left corner), select System Setting and click Network. Figure 175 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 305 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 2 Double-click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure. The Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown. Figure 176 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General If you have a dynamic IP address, click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and select dhcp from the drop down list. If you have a static IP address, click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway Address fields. 3 4 Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen. If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen. Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. Figure 177 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS 5 Click the Devices tab. 306 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Click the Activate button to apply the changes. The following screen displays. Click Yes to save the changes in all screens. Figure 178 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate After the network card restart process is complete, make sure the Status is Active in the Network Configuration screen. 6 7 Using Configuration Files Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address. 1 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer, locate the ifconfig-eth0 configuration file (where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card). Open the configuration file with any plain text editor. If you have a dynamic IP address, enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO= field. The following figure shows an example. Figure 179 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT=yes BOOTPROTO=dhcp USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes TYPE=Ethernet If you have a static IP address, enter static in the BOOTPROTO= field. Type IPADDR= followed by the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) and type NETMASK= followed by the subnet mask. The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192.168.1.10 and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. Figure 180 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT=yes BOOTPROTO=static IPADDR=192.168.1.10 NETMASK=255.255.255.0 USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes TYPE=Ethernet VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 307 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 2 3 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), enter the DNS server information in the resolv.conf file in the /etc directory. The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified. Figure 181 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf nameserver 172.23.5.1 nameserver 172.23.5.2 After you edit and save the configuration files, you must restart the network card. Enter ./network restart in the /etc/rc.d/init.d directory. The following figure shows an example. Figure 182 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card

[root@localhost init.d]# network restart Shutting down interface eth0: [OK]

Shutting down loopback interface:

[OK]

Setting network parameters: [OK]

Bringing up loopback interface: [OK]

Bringing up interface eth0:

[OK]

Verifying Settings Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP/IP properties. Figure 183 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1

[root@localhost]# ifconfig eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:50:BA:72:5B:44 inet addr:172.23.19.129 Bcast:172.23.19.255 Mask:255.255.255.0 RX packets:717 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 TX packets:13 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 RX bytes:730412 (713.2 Kb) TX bytes:1570 (1.5 Kb) Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1000

[root@localhost]#

collisions:0 txqueuelen:100 308 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide APPENDIX B IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks. IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered. Structure An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example, 192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation). Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in decimal. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 309 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets (192.168.1) are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID. Figure 184 Network Number and Host ID How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask. Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term subnet is short for sub-network. A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID. The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal). Table 113 Subnet Masks 1ST OCTET:

(192) IP Address (Binary) 11000000 2ND OCTET:

(168) 10101000 3RD OCTET:

(1) 00000001 4TH OCTET

(2) 00000010 Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits. 310 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a 1 value). For example, an 8-bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes. Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks. Table 114 Subnet Masks BINARY 1ST OCTET 11111111 8-bit mask 2ND OCTET 00000000 3RD OCTET 00000000 4TH OCTET DECIMAL 00000000 255.0.0.0 16-bit mask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255.255.0.0 24-bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255.255.255.0 29-bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255.255.255.248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits. An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network (192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows:

Table 115 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK 8 bits HOST ID SIZE 24 bits 255.0.0.0 16 bits 255.255.0.0 16 bits 24 bits 255.255.255.0 29 bits 255.255.255.24 8 8 bits 3 bits Notation 224 2 216 2 28 2 23 2 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 16777214 65534 254 6 Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a /

followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address. For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask 255.255.255.128. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 311 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations. Table 116 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252 ALTERNATIVE NOTATION

/24 LAST OCTET

(BINARY) 0000 0000 LAST OCTET

(DECIMAL) 0

/25

/26

/27

/28

/29

/30 1000 0000 1100 0000 1110 0000 1111 0000 1111 1000 1111 1100 128 192 224 240 248 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons. In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address

(192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts. The following figure shows the company network before subnetting. Figure 185 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate sub-

networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or /25). The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25. 312 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two sub-

networks, A and B. Figure 186 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnets address itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). 192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask 255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126. Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254. Example: Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits

(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192. Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). Table 117 Subnet 1 IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER IP Address (Decimal) 192.168.1. IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 0 00000000 11000000 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 313 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 117 Subnet 1 (continued) IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE Subnet Address:

192.168.1.0 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.63 Table 118 Subnet 2 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62 IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER IP Address 192.168.1. IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 64 01000000 11000000 Subnet Address:

192.168.1.64 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.127 Table 119 Subnet 3 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 128 IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 10000000 11000000 Subnet Address:

192.168.1.128 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.191 Table 120 Subnet 4 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 192 IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 11000000 Subnet Address:

192.168.1.192 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.255 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254 Example: Eight Subnets Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and 111). The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet. Table 121 Eight Subnets SUBNET ADDRESS 0 SUBNET 1 2 32 314 FIRST ADDRESS 1 33 LAST ADDRESS 30 62 BROADCAST ADDRESS 31 63 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 121 Eight Subnets (continued) SUBNET 3 4 5 6 7 8 SUBNET ADDRESS 64 96 128 160 192 224 FIRST ADDRESS 65 97 129 161 193 225 LAST ADDRESS 94 BROADCAST ADDRESS 95 126 158 190 222 254 127 159 191 223 255 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number. Table 122 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 255.255.255.128 (/25) SUBNET MASK 2 NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET 126 2 3 4 5 6 7 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 4 8 16 32 64 255.255.255.254 (/31) 128 62 30 14 6 2 1 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number. Table 123 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 SUBNET MASK 255.255.128.0 (/17) 2 NO. SUBNETS 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 255.255.192.0 (/18) 255.255.224.0 (/19) 255.255.240.0 (/20) 255.255.248.0 (/21) 255.255.252.0 (/22) 255.255.254.0 (/23) 255.255.255.0 (/24) 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET 32766 16382 8190 4094 2046 1022 510 254 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 315 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the Device. Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your Device that is easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:

10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. 316 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide APPENDIX C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your device. JavaScripts (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary. Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device. Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your devices IP address. Disable Pop-up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker. Figure 187 Pop-up Blocker You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab. 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 317 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 2 Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled. Figure 188 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Click Apply to save this setting. Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps. 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab. 318 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 2 Select Settingsto open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen. Figure 189 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix http://. For example, http://192.168.167.1. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 319 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites. Figure 190 Pop-up Blocker Settings 5 6 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen. Click Apply to save this setting. JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts are allowed. 320 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Figure 191 Internet Options: Security 2 3 Click the Custom Level... button. Scroll down to Scripting. 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default). VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 321 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 6 Click OK to close the window. Figure 192 Security Settings - Java Scripting Java Permissions 1 2 3 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Click the Custom Level... button. Scroll down to Microsoft VM. 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected. 322 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 5 Click OK to close the window. Figure 193 Security Settings - Java JAVA (Sun) 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab. 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 323 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 3 Click OK to close the window. Figure 194 Java (Sun) Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary. You can enable Java, Javascripts and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Options in the screen that appears. Figure 195 Mozilla Firefox: Tools > Options 324 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Click Content.to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen. Figure 196 Mozilla Firefox Content Security VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 325 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 326 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide APPENDIX D Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies. Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN. Figure 197 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 327 Appendix D Wireless LANs disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Figure 198 Basic Service Set ESS An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS). This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. 328 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate. Figure 199 Infrastructure WLAN Appendix D Wireless LANs Channel RTS/CTS A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance. Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11. A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 329 Appendix D Wireless LANs cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other. Figure 200 RTS/CTS When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations. RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked. When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS (Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission. Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS

(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS

(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy. Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames. A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference. 330 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point (and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:

Table 124 IEEE 802.11g DATA RATE (MBPS) MODULATION 1 DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed) 2 5.5 / 11 6/9/12/18/24/36/48/

54 DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) CCK (Complementary Code Keying) OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients, access points and the wired network. Wireless security methods available on the Device are data encryption, wireless client authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the Device identity. The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your Device. Table 125 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL Least Secure SECURITY TYPE Unique SSID (Default) Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) WPA2 Most Secure Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the Device and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 331 Appendix D Wireless LANs IEEE 802.1x In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:

User based identification that allows for roaming. Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server. Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients. RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:

Authentication Determines the identity of the users. Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network. Accounting Keeps track of the clients network activity. RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server. Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication:

Access-Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication. Access-Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access. Access-Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access. Access-Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message. The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting:

332 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Accounting-Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting. Accounting-Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting. In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access. Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types. EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication. The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that supports IEEE 802.1x. For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate (also called digital IDs) can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text. However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption. EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the senders identity. However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 333 Appendix D Wireless LANs EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service) EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-

side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2. PEAP (Protected EAP) Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco. LEAP LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x. Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed. If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled. Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types. Table 126 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP-TLS Yes EAP-MD5 No Mutual Authentication Certificate Client Certificate Server Dynamic Key Exchange Credential Integrity Deployment Difficulty No No No None Easy Client Identity Protection No EAP-TTLS Yes PEAP Yes Optional Optional Yes Yes Yes Yes LEAP Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Strong Strong Strong Moderate Hard No Moderate Moderate Moderate Yes Yes No 334 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide WPA and WPA2 Appendix D Wireless LANs Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication. If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN. If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not. Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2. Encryption WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons, but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP). TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael. They both include a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check

(MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism. WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the background automatically. The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped. By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 335 Appendix D Wireless LANs password-guessing attacks but its still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent, single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of WEP) User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre-authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices. Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again. Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it. Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client. The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-in "Zero Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it. WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system. 1 2 3 The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly. A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client. 336 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. Figure 201 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example WPA(2)-PSK Application Example A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows. 1 2 3 4 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and symbols). The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches. The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID. The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them. Figure 202 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 337 Appendix D Wireless LANs Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features. Table 127 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD/ KEY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open ENCRYPTIO N METHOD None No ENTER MANUAL KEY IEEE 802.1X Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Yes Yes No Yes No Yes TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable WPA WPA-PSK WPA2 WPA2-PSK Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air. The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air. Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN. Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz (IEEE 802.11a) is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antennas coverage area. Antenna Gain Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width. Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications. For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 338 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs 2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment. Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides. Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications. Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points. Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to 120 degrees (less directional). Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications. Positioning Antennas In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In point-topoint application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible. For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 339 Appendix D Wireless LANs 340 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide APPENDIX E IPv6 Overview IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses. IPv6 Addressing The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:

Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15. Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the network address. The prefix length is written as /x where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix. Link-local Address A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a private IP address in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a device. A link-local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast address format is as follows. Table 128 Link-local Unicast Address Format 1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID 10 bits 54 bits 64 bits VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 341 Appendix E IPv6 Global Address A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a public IP address in IPv4. A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3. Unspecified Address An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does not have its own address. It is similar to 0.0.0.0 in IPv4. Loopback Address A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to 127.0.0.1 in IPv4. Multicast Address In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses. Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group. Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses. Table 129 Predefined Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3 DESCRIPTION All hosts on a local node. All routers on a local node. All hosts on a local connected link. All routers on a local connected link. All routers on a local site. All DHCP severs on a local site. The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned to a multicast group. Table 130 Reserved Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 342 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Table 130 Reserved Multicast Address (continued) Appendix E IPv6 MULTICAST ADDRESS FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each blocks 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000. Interface ID In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One interface should have a unique interface ID. EUI-64 The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-bit (6-

byte) Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address. See the following example. MAC 00 : 13

: 49

: 12

: 34

: 56 EUI-64 02 : 13

: 49

: FF

: FE

: 12

: 34

: 56 Identity Association An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with exactly one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information. The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an identity association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary addresses. An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client sends the server (S1) (from which the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 343 Appendix E IPv6 the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's discretion. T1 T2 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Rebind to S2 Rebind to S2 DHCP Relay Agent A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-

known multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network. The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID option to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string, such as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the interface-ID option from the Relay-Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to the relay agent. The interface-ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts. Prefix Delegation Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the ISP (or a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The Device uses the received IPv6 prefix (for example, 2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements

(RAs) regularly by multicast, the Device passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses. ICMPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443. ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for IPv4. ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping". Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) The Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) is a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices and track neighbors reachability in a network. An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types:

Neighbor solicitation: A request from a host to determine a neighbors link-layer address (MAC address) and detect if the neighbor is still reachable. A neighbor being reachable means it responds to a neighbor solicitation message (from the host) with a neighbor advertisement message. 344 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix E IPv6 Neighbor advertisement: A response from a node to announce its link-layer address. Router solicitation: A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and forward packets. Router advertisement: A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters. IPv6 Cache An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache, destination cache, prefix list and default router list. The Device maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from response messages. In IPv6, the Device configures a link-local address automatically, and then sends a neighbor solicitation message to check if the address is unique. If there is an address to be resolved or verified, the Device also sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the Device receives a neighbor advertisement in response, it stores the neighbors link-layer address in the neighbor cache. When the Device uses a router solicitation message to query for a router and receives a router advertisement message, it adds the routers information to the neighbor cache, prefix list and destination cache. The Device creates an entry in the default router list cache if the router can be used as a default router. When the Device needs to send a packet, it first consults the destination cache to determine the next hop. If there is no matching entry in the destination cache, the Device uses the prefix list to determine whether the destination address is on-link and can be reached directly without passing through a router. If the address is unlink, the address is considered as the next hop. Otherwise, the Device determines the next-hop from the default router list or routing table. Once the next hop IP address is known, the Device looks into the neighbor cache to get the link-layer address and sends the packet when the neighbor is reachable. If the Device cannot find an entry in the neighbor cache or the state for the neighbor is not reachable, it starts the address resolution process. This helps reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages. Multicast Listener Discovery The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3. MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network. MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4. MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join. MLD Messages A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report message for that address. An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave a multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. The router or switch then sends a group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if other devices connected to this port should remain in the group. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 345 Appendix E IPv6 Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the ipv6 install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the ipconfig command to see auto-generated IP addresses. C:\>ipv6 install Installing... Succeeded. C:\>ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

Subnet Mask . : 255.255.255.0 IP Address. : fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4 IP Address. : 10.1.1.46 Default Gateway . : 10.1.1.254 IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check your automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the interface on your computer. Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment, you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore this section.) This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:

1 2 3 Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer. After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-DHCPv6 > Client Install as service. Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services. 346 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 4 Double click Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client. Appendix E IPv6 5 Click Start and then OK. 6 Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7 Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7 computer. To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:

1 2 3 Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection. Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it. Click OK to save the change. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 347 Appendix E IPv6 4 5 Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 6 Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global address (2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server. C:\>ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

IPv6 Address. : 2001:b021:2d::1000 Link-local IPv6 Address . : fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11 IPv4 Address. : 172.16.100.61 Subnet Mask . : 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway . : fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11 172.16.100.254 348 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide APPENDIX F Services The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers. Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one, if you like. Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number. Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number. If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number. Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 349 Appendix F Services Table 131 Examples of Services PROTOCOL NAME AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined PORT(S) 51 AIM AUTH BGP BOOTP_CLIENT BOOTP_SERVER CU-SEEME DNS TCP TCP TCP UDP UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP ESP

(IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined FINGER FTP H.323 HTTP HTTPS ICMP ICQ TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP User-Defined UDP IGMP (MULTICAST) User-Defined IKE IMAP4 IMAP4S IRC UDP TCP TCP TCP/UDP MSN Messenger TCP NetBIOS TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP 5190 113 179 68 67 7648 24032 53 50 79 20 21 1720 80 443 1 4000 2 500 143 993 6667 1863 137 138 139 445 DESCRIPTION The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service. AOLs Internet Messenger service. Authentication protocol used by some servers. Border Gateway Protocol. DHCP Client. DHCP Server. A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software. Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (for instance www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers. The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service. Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on. File Transfer Protocol, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. NetMeeting uses this protocol. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/

server protocol for the world wide web. HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce. Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic purposes. This is a popular Internet chat program. Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts. The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management. The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e-mail. This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs over SSL. This is another popular Internet chat program. Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol. The Network Basic Input/Output System is used for communication between computers in a LAN. 350 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Table 131 Examples of Services (continued) Appendix F Services PROTOCOL TCP PORT(S) 5190 DESCRIPTION An Internet chat program. NAME NEW-ICQ NEWS NFS NNTP PING POP3 POP3S PPTP TCP UDP TCP 144 2049 119 User-Defined 1 TCP TCP TCP 110 995 1723 PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE) User-Defined 47 RCMD REAL_AUDIO REXEC RLOGIN TCP TCP TCP TCP ROADRUNNER TCP/UDP RTELNET RTSP TCP TCP/UDP SFTP SMTP SMTPS SNMP SNMP-TRAPS TCP TCP TCP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP 512 7070 514 513 1026 107 554 115 25 465 161 162 A protocol for news groups. Network File System - NFS is a client/

server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments. Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service. Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable. Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other). This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs over SSL. Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel. Remote Command Service. A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web. Remote Execution Daemon. Remote Login. This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems. Remote Telnet. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet. The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another. This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL. Simple Network Management Program. Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215). VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 351 Appendix F Services Table 131 Examples of Services (continued) NAME SQL-NET PROTOCOL TCP PORT(S) 1521 SSDP SSH STRM WORKS SYSLOG TACACS TELNET VDOLIVE UDP TCP/UDP UDP UDP UDP TCP TCP UDP 1900 22 1558 514 49 23 7000 user-

defined DESCRIPTION Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers. The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP). Secure Shell Remote Login Program. Stream Works Protocol. Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server. Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System). Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/

IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems. A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port number is specified in the application. 352 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide APPENDIX G Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2012 by MitraStar Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by MitraStar Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimer MitraStar does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Certifications Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

1 2 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 353 Appendix G Legal Information 3 4 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. IEEE 802.11b/g/n(HT20) operation of this product in the U.S.A.is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. In 11n(HT40) mode, it is firmware-limited to channels 3 throug 9. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons.

Notices CAUTION:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France. Ce produit est conu pour les bandes de frquences 2,4 GHz et/ou 5 GHz conformment la lgislation Europenne. En France mtropolitaine, suivant les dcisions n03-908 et 03-909 de lARCEP, la puissance dmission ne devra pas dpasser 10 mW (10 dB) dans le cadre dune installation WiFi en extrieur pour les frquences comprises entre 2454 MHz et 2483,5 MHz. This Class [*] digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe [*] est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. MitraStar Limited Warranty MitraStar warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the 354 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Appendix G Legal Information warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, MitraStar will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of MitraStar. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. MitraStar shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact MitraStar's Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of MitraStar) and the customer will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by MitraStar to the corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country. Registration Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products. Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do NOT store things on the device. Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord. Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution. If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source. Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one. Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device. Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord. VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 355 Appendix G Legal Information Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s). This product is for indoor use only (utilisation intrieure exclusivement). The screen of the coaxial cable is intended to be connected to earth in the building installation. Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately. 356 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Index Index A ACL rule 215 ACS 257 activation firewalls 211 media server 207 SIP ALG 186 SSID 108 adding a printer example 63 Address Resolution Protocol 243 administrator password 26 alternative subnet mask notation 312 antenna directional 339 gain 338 omni-directional 339 AP (access point) 329 applications Internet access 18 media server 206 activation 207 iTunes server 206 applications, NAT 191 ARP Table 243, 245 authentication 119, 120 RADIUS server 120 Auto Configuration Server, see ACS 257 B backup configuration 273 Basic Service Set, See BSS 327 Basic Service Set, see BSS blinking LEDs 21 Broadband 75 broadcast 97 BSS 122, 327 example 122 C CA 227, 333 Canonical Format Indicator See CFI CCMs 276 certificate factory default 228 Certificate Authority See CA. certificates 227 authentication 227 CA creating 229 public key 227 replacing 228 storage space 228 Certification Authority 227 Certification Authority. see CA certifications 353 notices 354 CFI 97 CFM 276 CCMs 276 link trace test 276 loopback test 276 MA 276 MD 276 MEP 276 MIP 276 channel 329 interference 329 channel, wireless LAN 118 client list 136 compatibility, WDS 113 configuration backup 273 firewalls 211 reset 275 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 357 Index restoring 274 static route 93, 155, 195 Connectivity Check Messages, see CCMs copyright 353 CoS 172 CoS technologies 160 creating certificates 229 CTS (Clear to Send) 330 CTS threshold 115, 119 D data fragment threshold 115, 119 DDoS 210 default server address 185 Denials of Service, see DoS DHCP 132, 150 Differentiated Services, see DiffServ 172 DiffServ 172 marking rule 173 digital IDs 227 disclaimer 353 DLNA 206 DMZ 185 DNS 132, 151 DNS server address assignment 97 Domain Name 191 Domain Name System, see DNS Domain Name System. See DNS. DoS 210 DS field 172 DS, dee differentiated services DSCP 172 dynamic DNS 193 wildcard 194 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP dynamic WEP key exchange 334 DYNDNS wildcard 194 E EAP Authentication 333 ECHO 191 e-mail log example 268 Encapsulation 93 MER 94 PPP over Ethernet 94 encapsulation 76 RFC 1483 94 encryption 121, 335 ESS 328 Extended Service Set IDentification 102, 109 Extended Service Set, See ESS 328 F FCC interference statement 353 File Sharing 204 file sharing 20 filters MAC address 109, 120 Finger 191 firewalls 209 add protocols 211 configuration 211 DDoS 210 DoS 210 LAND attack 210 Ping of Death 210 SYN attack 210 firmware 271 version 73 forwarding ports 178 fragmentation threshold 115, 119, 330 FTP 178, 191 G General wireless LAN screen 100 358 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Index H hidden node 329 HTTP 191 I IANA 316 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority see IANA IBSS 327 IEEE 802.11g 331 IEEE 802.1Q 97 IGA 189 IGMP 97 multicast group list 247 version 97 ILA 189 Independent Basic Service Set See IBSS 327 initialization vector (IV) 335 Inside Global Address, see IGA Inside Local Address, see ILA interface group 197 Internet wizard setup 33 Internet access 18 wizard setup 33 Internet Protocol version 6 77 Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6 Internet Service Provider, see ISP IP address 132, 151 ping 277 private 152 WAN 76 IP Address Assignment 96 IP alias NAT applications 191 IPv6 77, 341 addressing 77, 98, 341 EUI-64 343 global address 342 interface ID 343 link-local address 341 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 341 ping 341 prefix 77, 98, 341 prefix delegation 78 prefix length 77, 98, 341 unspecified address 342 ISP 76 iTunes server 206 L LAN 131 client list 136 DHCP 132, 150 DNS 132, 151 IP address 132, 133, 151 MAC address 137 status 73 subnet mask 132, 133, 151 LAND attack 210 LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration 259 LBR 276 limitations wireless LAN 121 WPS 129 link trace 276 Link Trace Message, see LTM Link Trace Response, see LTR login 25 passwords 26 logs 235, 239, 247, 267 Loop Back Response, see LBR loopback 276 LTM 276 LTR 276 M MA 276 MAC address 110, 137 filter 109, 120 MAC authentication 109 Mac filter 219 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 359 Index Maintenance Association, see MA Maintenance Domain, see MD Maintenance End Point, see MEP managing the device good habits 17 Maximum Burst Size (MBS) 95 MBSSID 122 MD 276 media server 206 activation 207 iTunes server 206 MEP 276 MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 96 multicast 97 Multiple BSS, see MBSSID multiplexing 94 LLC-based 95 VC-based 94 multiprotocol encapsulation 94 N NAT 177, 179, 188, 189, 316 applications 191 IP alias 191 example 190 global 189 IGA 189 ILA 189 inside 189 local 189 outside 189 port forwarding 178 port number 191 services 191 SIP ALG 186 activation 186 NAT example 192 Network Address Translation see NAT Network Address Translation, see NAT Network Map 71 network map 29 NNTP 191 P Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 335, 337 passwords 26 PBC 124 Peak Cell Rate (PCR) 95 Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB 173 PHB 173 PIN, WPS 124 example 126 Ping of Death 210 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 191 POP3 191 port forwarding 178 ports 21 PPP over Ethernet, see PPPoE PPPoE 76, 94 Benefits 94 PPTP 191 preamble 116, 119 preamble mode 123 prefix delegation 78 Printer Server 207 printer sharing 62 configuration 62 requirements 207 private IP address 152 product registration 355 protocol 76 PSK 335 push button 23 Push Button Configuration, see PBC push button, WPS 124 Q QoS 159, 172 marking 160 setup 159 tagging 160 versus CoS 160 Quality of Service, see QoS 360 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Index R RADIUS 332 message types 332 messages 332 shared secret key 333 RADIUS server 120 registration product 355 related documentation 2 remote management TR-069 257 Remote Procedure Calls, see RPCs 257 reset 22, 275 restart 275 restoring configuration 274 RFC 1058. See RIP. RFC 1389. See RIP. RFC 1483 94 RFC 3164 235 RIP 157 router features 18 Routing Information Protocol. See RIP RPPCs 257 RTS (Request To Send) 330 threshold 329, 330 RTS threshold 115, 119 S security wireless LAN 119 Security Log 237 Security Parameter Index, see SPI service access control 255 Service Set 102, 109 Services 191 setup firewalls 211 static route 93, 155, 195 Single Rate Three Color Marker, see srTCM SIP ALG 186 activation 186 SMTP 191 SNMP 191 SNMP trap 191 SPI 210 srTCM 174 SSID 120 activation 108 MBSSID 122 static route 153, 265 configuration 93, 155, 195 example 153 static VLAN status 71 firmware version 73 LAN 73 WAN 73 wireless LAN 73 status indicators 21 subnet 309 subnet mask 132, 151, 310 subnetting 312 Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) 95 SYN attack 210 syslog protocol 235 severity levels 235 system firmware 271 version 73 passwords 26 reset 22 status 71 LAN 73 WAN 73 wireless LAN 73 time 261 T Tag Control Information See TCI Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID TCI The 76 thresholds data fragment 115, 119 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 361 Index RTS/CTS 115, 119 time 261 TPID 97 TR-064 259 TR-069 257 ACS setup 257 authentication 258 traffic shaping 95 trTCM 175 Two Rate Three Color Marker, see trTCM U unicast 97 Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP upgrading firmware 271 UPnP 138 cautions 133 example 139 installation 139 NAT traversal 132 USB features 20 V VID Virtual Circuit (VC) 94 Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN VLAN 96 Introduction 96 number of possible VIDs priority frame static VLAN ID 97 VLAN Identifier See VID VLAN tag 97 W WAN status 73 Wide Area Network, see WAN 75 warranty note 355 WDS 113, 123 compatibility 113 example 123 web configurator 25 login 25 passwords 26 WEP 121 WEP Encryption 104, 105 WEP encryption 103 WEP key 103 Wi-Fi Protected Access 335 wireless client WPA supplicants 336 Wireless Distribution System, see WDS wireless LAN 99, 117 authentication 119, 120 BSS 122 example 122 channel 118 encryption 121 example 118 fragmentation threshold 115, 119 limitations 121 MAC address filter 109, 120 MBSSID 122 preamble 116, 119 RADIUS server 120 RTS/CTS threshold 115, 119 security 119 SSID 120 activation 108 status 73 WDS 113, 123 compatibility 113 example 123 WEP 121 WPA 121 WPA-PSK 121 WPS 123, 126 example 127 limitations 129 PIN 124 push button 23, 124 wireless security 331 Wireless tutorial 40 wizard setup Internet 33 362 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Index WLAN interference 329 security parameters 338 WPA 121, 335 key caching 336 pre-authentication 336 user authentication 336 vs WPA-PSK 335 wireless client supplicant 336 with RADIUS application example 336 WPA2 335 user authentication 336 vs WPA2-PSK 335 wireless client supplicant 336 with RADIUS application example 336 WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 335 WPA2-PSK 335 application example 337 WPA-PSK 121, 335 application example 337 WPS 123, 126 example 127 limitations 129 PIN 124 example 126 push button 23, 124 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 363 Index 364 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide Index VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide 365 Index 366 VMG4380-B10A / VMG4325-B10A Users Guide